1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes true
138 \output_changes false
142 \author 1414654397 "Richard Heck"
153 by the \SpecialChar LyX
158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
160 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
161 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
162 Documentation mailing list:
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Note Note
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
195 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
203 \begin_layout Standard
204 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
205 LatexCommand tableofcontents
212 \begin_layout Chapter
216 \begin_layout Section
217 What is \SpecialChar LyX
221 \begin_layout Standard
223 is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
263 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
267 \begin_layout Standard
268 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
273 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
277 \begin_layout Standard
282 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
283 's philosophy: most importantly,
284 the format of all of the manuals.
285 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
286 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
292 manual describes that, too.
295 \begin_layout Section
300 \begin_layout Standard
301 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
302 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
304 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
305 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
311 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
312 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
314 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
315 only a vertical scrollbar.
316 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
317 The first case is large images.
318 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
319 image and use the option
330 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
333 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
334 this doesn't work for equations yet.
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
339 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
347 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
354 \begin_layout Section
358 \begin_layout Standard
359 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
361 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
363 Just select the manual you want to read from the
370 \begin_layout Section
371 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
375 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
384 can be configured via the menu
386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
390 \begin_inset Index idx
393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
400 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
403 packages are available.
404 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
406 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
408 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
413 \begin_inset space \space{}
416 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
419 To force \SpecialChar LyX
420 to re-inspect your system, you should use
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
436 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
437 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
440 \begin_layout Section
443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
445 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
452 \begin_layout Standard
453 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
454 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
455 installed, but you will not be
456 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
457 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
458 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
459 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
460 document can always be output as plain text
464 \begin_layout Standard
465 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 or DocBook classes or packages.
467 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
468 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
474 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
477 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
485 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
486 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 \begin_inset Index idx
496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
497 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
505 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \begin_layout Chapter
517 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
521 \begin_layout Section
522 Basic File Operations
523 \begin_inset Index idx
526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
535 \begin_layout Standard
540 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
541 in addition to some more advanced operations:
544 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
582 arg "buffer-new-template"
588 \begin_layout Itemize
610 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "buffer-write-as"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
688 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Standard
703 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
704 a few minor differences.
707 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
718 command lists the available templates.
719 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
720 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
721 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
729 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
736 \begin_layout Standard
737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
770 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
771 is just that — a big, blank space.
779 \begin_layout Standard
800 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
805 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
808 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
826 will reload the document from disk.
827 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
828 and want to restore it to the last save.
837 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
838 them as your changes.
841 \begin_layout Section
842 Basic Editing Features
843 \begin_inset Index idx
846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
855 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
862 \begin_layout Standard
863 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
864 can perform cut and paste operations
865 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
866 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
867 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
868 editing features and how to access
870 We will start with cut and paste.
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 As you might expect, the
878 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
879 various other editing features.
880 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
884 \begin_layout Itemize
890 \begin_inset Index idx
893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
994 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_layout Itemize
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1014 \begin_layout Itemize
1018 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset Index idx
1031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_inset Index idx
1043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1058 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1068 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1074 \begin_layout Standard
1075 The first three are self-explanatory.
1076 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1077 and other programs by
1098 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1099 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1104 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1105 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1106 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1107 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1108 into individual cells.
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1117 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1118 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1122 \begin_layout Standard
1126 \begin_inset space ~
1131 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1133 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1148 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1149 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1150 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1156 \begin_inset space \space{}
1159 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1160 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1163 \begin_inset space ~
1166 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1185 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1186 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1188 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1197 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1198 start a new paragraph.
1199 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1200 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1208 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1225 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1228 paste from the primary selection.
1229 This is normally the currently selected text.
1232 \begin_layout Standard
1235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1259 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1265 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1282 button to skip the current word.
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1302 If the toggle is set, searching for
1303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1314 will not match the word
1315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1329 Match whole words only
1331 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1332 to only find complete words, e.
1333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1362 offers also an advanced
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1374 feature that is described in section
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1381 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1388 \begin_layout Standard
1389 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1390 \begin_inset space \space{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1402 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1404 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1409 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1420 arg "inset-select-all"
1423 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1424 When the cursor is inside an inset
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 selects the content of the inset.
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1442 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1445 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1449 \begin_layout Section
1451 \begin_inset Index idx
1454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1473 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1481 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1483 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1489 or the toolbar button
1495 to undo some mistake.
1496 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1501 or the toolbar button
1508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1515 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1522 \begin_layout Standard
1523 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1532 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1533 This is a consequence of the 100
1534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1537 step undo limit mentioned above.
1540 \begin_layout Standard
1549 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1551 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1555 \begin_layout Section
1557 \begin_inset Index idx
1560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1569 \begin_layout Standard
1570 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1573 \begin_layout Enumerate
1578 \begin_layout Itemize
1583 once anywhere in the edit window.
1584 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1588 \begin_layout Enumerate
1593 \begin_layout Itemize
1600 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1606 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1607 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1610 \begin_layout Itemize
1611 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1622 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1628 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1632 \begin_layout Section
1634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1636 name "sec:Navigating"
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1655 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1664 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1670 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1672 \begin_inset space ~
1677 or by the toolbar button
1680 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1686 \begin_layout Itemize
1687 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1689 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1692 and use the same menu to return to them.
1693 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1696 \begin_layout Standard
1700 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1705 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1706 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1708 \begin_inset space ~
1713 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1714 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1715 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1716 your last editing position.
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1724 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1728 \begin_layout Subsection
1730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1732 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1737 \begin_inset Index idx
1740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1741 Navigating ! Outline
1747 \begin_inset Index idx
1750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space ~
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1775 \begin_inset space ~
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1869 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1870 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1885 So, for example, you can move section
1886 \begin_inset space ~
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1893 2.4 or after section
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1899 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1912 (or the corresponding key bindings
1920 ) you can change the level of sections.
1921 So you can for example make section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \begin_layout Subsection
1937 Horizontal Scrolling
1938 \begin_inset Index idx
1941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1942 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1952 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1958 \begin_inset space \space{}
1962 \begin_inset space ~
1965 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1966 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1967 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1976 \begin_layout Itemize
1978 is used on a small tablet computer
1981 \begin_layout Itemize
1982 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1994 \begin_inset space ~
2007 \begin_layout Itemize
2008 Math constructs with long command names
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2012 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2013 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2015 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2016 windows so that table
2017 \begin_inset space ~
2021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2023 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2028 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2030 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2031 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 \begin_inset Float table
2041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2047 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2051 Horizontal scrolling test.
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Tabular
2062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2108 \begin_layout Section
2109 Input/Word Completion
2110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2112 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2117 \begin_inset Index idx
2120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_inset Index idx
2130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2161 \begin_layout Standard
2163 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2165 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2166 is used to propose completions.
2169 \begin_layout Standard
2170 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2173 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2185 \begin_inset space ~
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2194 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2204 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2214 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2215 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2216 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2217 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2220 \begin_layout Standard
2222 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2223 completions available.
2228 key to accept a proposed completion.
2229 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2230 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2231 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2240 ing options for text.
2241 The special math option
2245 enables characters to be composed.
2246 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2247 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2250 , you can then input the characters
2251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2262 to a formula to get it.
2263 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2264 of the math toolbar.
2265 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2269 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2270 's installation folder.
2271 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2280 \begin_layout Section
2282 \begin_inset Index idx
2285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2292 \begin_inset Index idx
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2324 \begin_inset Index idx
2327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2358 \begin_layout Standard
2359 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2373 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2376 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2380 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2381 \begin_inset space ~
2385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2387 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2394 \begin_layout Standard
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset space ~
2427 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2431 \begin_layout Labeling
2432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2436 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2437 LatexCommand nomenclature
2439 description "Tabulator key"
2445 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2447 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2448 \begin_inset space ~
2452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2454 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2461 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2465 , especially section
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "subsec:Lists"
2478 If you are still confused, look in the
2483 \begin_inset Newline newline
2491 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2492 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2496 \begin_layout Labeling
2497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2502 LatexCommand nomenclature
2504 description "Escape key"
2511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2518 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2519 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2522 \begin_layout Labeling
2523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2540 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2541 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 There are three modifier keys:
2549 \begin_layout Labeling
2550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2568 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2569 LatexCommand nomenclature
2571 description "Control key"
2575 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2576 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2580 \begin_layout Itemize
2589 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2592 \begin_layout Itemize
2601 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2617 \begin_layout Labeling
2618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2636 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2637 LatexCommand nomenclature
2639 description "Shift key"
2643 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2644 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2647 \begin_layout Labeling
2648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2666 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2667 LatexCommand nomenclature
2669 description "Alt or Meta key"
2673 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2674 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2675 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2681 \begin_inset Newline newline
2684 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2686 menu accelerator keys
2689 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2690 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2694 \begin_layout Standard
2695 For example, the sequence
2696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2702 \begin_inset space ~
2706 \begin_inset space ~
2712 \begin_inset space ~
2720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2739 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2760 manual lists all other things bound to the
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2771 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2772 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2773 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2774 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2775 The \SpecialChar LyX
2776 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2777 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2778 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2780 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2796 followed by a capital
2803 \begin_layout Chapter
2806 \begin_inset Index idx
2809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2819 \begin_layout Section
2821 \begin_inset Index idx
2824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2833 \begin_layout Subsection
2837 \begin_layout Standard
2838 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2839 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2840 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2841 numbering schemes, and so on.
2842 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2843 and format the title of your document differently.
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2851 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2852 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2853 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2854 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2855 picks one for you by default.
2856 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_inset Index idx
2864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2873 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2880 \begin_layout Standard
2881 You can select a class using the
2883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2888 \begin_inset Index idx
2891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2898 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2912 \begin_layout Description
2913 Article for basic articles
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Report for basic reports
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Book for writing a book
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Letter for US-style letters
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2930 only uses if you have installed
2931 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2933 distributions will include
2935 Here are some of the classes.
2936 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2938 Special Document Classes
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2961 \begin_layout Description
2962 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2963 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2964 There are three article layouts available.
2965 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2966 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2967 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2968 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2973 sequential numbering
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2978 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2979 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2980 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 Beamer Layout for presentations
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2989 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2990 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2991 with \SpecialChar LyX
2995 \begin_layout Description
2996 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2999 \begin_layout Description
3001 \begin_inset space ~
3004 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Foils Used to make transparencies
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3017 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3018 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3019 with \SpecialChar LyX
3023 \begin_layout Description
3024 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3025 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3028 \begin_layout Description
3029 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3038 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3039 (Is used by this document.)
3042 \begin_layout Description
3043 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3050 \begin_layout Description
3055 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3056 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3058 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 Slides Used to make transparencies
3066 \begin_layout Description
3068 \begin_inset space ~
3071 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3072 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3075 \begin_layout Description
3076 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3082 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3084 Special Document Classes
3091 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3092 of the document classes.
3095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3099 \begin_layout Standard
3100 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3105 \begin_inset Index idx
3108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3126 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3128 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3131 \begin_layout Standard
3134 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3139 , are highly specialized.
3141 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3142 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3143 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3145 by some document class.
3146 There are just too many of them.
3147 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3150 \begin_layout Standard
3151 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3159 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3160 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3161 document class for a new file.
3163 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3166 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3173 manual for information on how to install them.
3174 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3180 \begin_layout Standard
3181 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3182 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3183 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3184 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3185 class files to be used for dissertation
3186 s submitted to those universities.
3187 The \SpecialChar LyX
3188 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3190 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3194 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3200 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3207 name "subsec:Modules"
3212 \begin_inset Index idx
3215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3224 \begin_layout Standard
3225 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3226 chosen document class.
3227 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3228 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3239 \begin_inset Index idx
3242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3255 packages or file format converters that are not always
3256 installed by default.
3258 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3259 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3260 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3261 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3263 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 file without the missing prerequisites.
3265 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3266 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3273 \begin_inset Index idx
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3283 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3291 \begin_layout Standard
3292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3302 will advise you about these things.
3310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3314 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3319 \begin_inset Index idx
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Document ! Local Layout
3331 \begin_layout Standard
3332 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3333 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 : They are intended to be used in
3335 a variety of different documents.
3336 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3337 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3338 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3339 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3340 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3342 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3360 manual for information on how to use it.
3363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3367 \begin_layout Standard
3368 Each class has a default set of options.
3369 Here's a quick table describing them:
3372 \begin_layout Standard
3373 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3379 \begin_layout Standard
3381 \begin_inset Tabular
3382 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3383 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 \begin_layout Standard
3843 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3849 \begin_layout Standard
3850 You're probably also wondering what
3851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3855 \begin_inset space ~
3859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3863 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3864 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3869 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3874 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3884 headings, there are also
3892 headings, and so on.
3893 We will describe these headings fully in section
3894 \begin_inset space ~
3898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3900 reference "subsec:Headings"
3907 \begin_layout Subsection
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3911 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3916 \begin_inset Index idx
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_inset Index idx
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3938 \begin_layout Standard
3939 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3948 \begin_inset space ~
3956 \begin_inset space ~
3961 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3963 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3964 doesn't support special options you want to
3965 use for your document.
3966 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3967 -class and its options, you have to read
3971 \begin_layout Standard
3975 \begin_inset space ~
3982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset space ~
3993 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3994 You can choose between the following five options:
3997 \begin_layout Labeling
3998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4003 Use default page style of current class.
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 No page numbers or headings.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4030 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4031 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4032 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4033 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4043 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4049 \begin_inset Index idx
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4054 -packages ! fancyhdr
4060 How they are defined is explained in section
4061 \begin_inset space ~
4065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4067 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4074 \begin_layout Standard
4075 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4076 \begin_inset space ~
4080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4082 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4090 Paper Size and Orientation
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4095 Document ! Paper size
4101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4103 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 You can find the following options in the menu
4114 \begin_inset space ~
4121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4137 \begin_layout Labeling
4138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4142 \begin_inset space ~
4147 What size paper to print on.
4152 \begin_layout Itemize
4158 \begin_layout Itemize
4164 \begin_layout Itemize
4170 \begin_layout Itemize
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 US letter, US legal, US executive
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Labeling
4196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4201 To choose whether to output as
4212 \begin_layout Labeling
4213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4217 \begin_inset space ~
4222 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4223 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4226 \begin_layout Subsection
4228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4230 name "subsec:Margins"
4235 \begin_inset Index idx
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 \begin_inset Index idx
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4257 \begin_layout Standard
4258 Paper margins are set in the menu
4260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4277 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4278 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4279 the paper format and the font size into account.
4282 \begin_layout Subsection
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4293 That includes the paragraph environments.
4294 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4295 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4296 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4298 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4307 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4309 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4310 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4311 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4314 \begin_layout Section
4315 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4316 \begin_inset Index idx
4319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 Paragraph ! Indentation
4328 \begin_layout Subsection
4330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4332 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4339 \begin_layout Standard
4340 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4341 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4344 \begin_layout Standard
4345 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4346 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4347 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4348 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4352 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4358 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4359 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4360 language than English.
4362 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4367 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4368 into \SpecialChar LyX
4370 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4373 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4375 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4376 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4377 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4384 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4385 goes to produce a printable file.
4390 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4392 gives you the ability globally to change
4396 these pre-coded spacings.
4397 We will explain more later.
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4401 Paragraph Separation
4402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4404 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 Paragraph ! Separation
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4429 \begin_inset space ~
4437 \begin_inset space ~
4444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4448 \begin_inset Index idx
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4460 \begin_layout Subsection
4464 \begin_layout Standard
4465 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset space ~
4475 dialog and toggle the
4478 \begin_inset space ~
4483 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4486 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4490 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4491 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4497 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset Index idx
4505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4506 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4537 \begin_inset space ~
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4547 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4553 \begin_inset Index idx
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 -packages ! setspace
4563 installed to use this feature.
4568 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4578 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4581 \begin_layout Section
4582 Paragraph Environments
4583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4585 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4590 \begin_inset Index idx
4593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 Paragraph ! Environments
4600 \begin_inset Index idx
4603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4604 Paragraph environments|(
4612 \begin_layout Subsection
4616 \begin_layout Standard
4617 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4629 } \SpecialChar ldots
4639 \begin_inset Newline newline
4642 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4645 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4646 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4655 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4658 \begin_layout Standard
4659 A paragraph environment is simply a
4660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4667 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4668 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4669 scheme, labels, and so on.
4670 Additionally, you can
4671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4678 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4679 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4680 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4681 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4683 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4685 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4690 \begin_inset Graphics
4691 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4697 at the left end of the toolbar.
4699 will change the environment of the
4703 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4704 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4705 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4709 \begin_layout Standard
4718 create a new paragraph using the
4722 paragraph environment.
4724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4731 because if you are in one of these environments:
4734 \begin_layout Itemize
4740 \begin_layout Itemize
4746 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 \begin_layout Itemize
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4778 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4782 , rather than resetting it to
4787 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4788 \begin_inset space ~
4792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4794 reference "sec:Nesting"
4801 \begin_layout Subsection
4805 \begin_layout Standard
4806 The default paragraph environment is
4811 It creates a plain paragraph.
4813 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4814 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4815 this manual) are in the
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 You can nest a paragraph using the
4827 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4835 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 \begin_inset Index idx
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 \begin_layout Standard
4850 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4851 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4860 for thanks or contact information.
4861 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4862 places all of this on a separate page
4863 along with today's date.
4864 For other types of documents, the title
4865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4872 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4876 \begin_layout Standard
4878 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4892 Here's how you use them:
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4896 Put the title of your document in the
4903 \begin_layout Itemize
4904 Put the author name in the
4911 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4913 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4919 Note that using this environment is optional.
4920 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4921 will automatically insert today's date.
4922 If you don't want a date, use the option
4924 Suppress default date on front page
4928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4931 \begin_inset space ~
4939 \begin_layout Standard
4940 You can use footnotes to insert
4941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4948 or contact information.
4951 \begin_layout Subsection
4953 \begin_inset Index idx
4956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4965 name "subsec:Headings"
4972 \begin_layout Standard
4973 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4975 takes care of the numbering for you.
4978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4984 Section headings ! Numbered
4992 \begin_layout Standard
4993 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4997 \begin_layout Enumerate
5003 \begin_layout Enumerate
5009 \begin_layout Enumerate
5015 \begin_layout Enumerate
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Standard
5041 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5042 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5043 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5048 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5049 You group the book into chapters.
5051 does a similar grouping:
5054 \begin_layout Itemize
5059 is divided into either
5070 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 \begin_layout Itemize
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Standard
5131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 Not all document types use the
5143 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5148 is the top-level heading.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5161 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5162 labels it with its number,
5163 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5165 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5179 \begin_inset Index idx
5182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5192 The unnumbered section headings have a
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 at the end of their name.
5201 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5202 the table of contents, see section
5203 \begin_inset space ~
5207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5217 Changing the Numbering
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5220 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5227 \begin_layout Standard
5228 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5229 in the Table of Contents.
5230 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5232 Just as certain classes start with
5246 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5256 This is something you can change.
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5266 \begin_inset Index idx
5269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5278 \begin_inset space ~
5282 \begin_inset space ~
5287 you will see two counters.
5292 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5293 numbers a section heading.
5294 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5299 Short Titles of Headings
5300 \begin_inset Index idx
5303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 Section headings ! Short titles
5310 \begin_inset Argument 1
5313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5322 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5329 \begin_layout Standard
5330 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5331 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5332 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5333 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5338 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5339 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5340 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5341 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5346 \begin_inset space ~
5352 This will insert a box labeled
5353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5357 \begin_inset space ~
5361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5364 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5365 This also works for captions inside floats.
5366 There can only be one short title per title.
5369 \begin_layout Standard
5370 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5377 \begin_layout Standard
5378 The following information applies to all section headings:
5381 \begin_layout Itemize
5382 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5397 \begin_layout Subsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5403 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5417 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5418 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5419 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5420 the text they contain.
5421 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5429 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5433 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5442 when you start a new paragraph.
5443 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5447 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5448 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5449 have to change back to the
5453 environment yourself.
5456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5465 \begin_inset Index idx
5468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5477 \begin_layout Standard
5478 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5479 time for the differences.
5488 are identical except for one difference:
5492 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5501 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5505 Here's an example of the
5518 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5520 See – no indentation!
5524 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5525 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5526 the other paragraph.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's another example, this time in the
5537 \begin_layout Quotation
5543 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5544 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5545 the first line, then
5549 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5553 you were quoting other text.
5556 \begin_layout Quotation
5557 Here's a new paragraph.
5558 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5559 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5563 As the examples show,
5567 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5568 They should put quotes in the
5573 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5577 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5592 \begin_inset Index idx
5595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5611 \begin_layout Standard
5616 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5622 \begin_inset Newline newline
5625 Which I did not rehearse!
5629 It could be much worse.
5630 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5632 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5633 indented a bit more than the first.
5634 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5640 \begin_inset Newline newline
5643 And make things look fine
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 arg "newline-insert newline"
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5661 does not indent both margins.
5662 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5663 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5666 arg "newline-insert newline"
5672 \begin_layout Subsection
5674 \begin_inset Index idx
5677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 \begin_layout Standard
5695 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5705 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5706 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5715 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5716 lets you provide your own label.
5717 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5718 describing some general features of all four of them.
5721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5725 \begin_layout Standard
5726 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5728 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5738 reset the environment to
5742 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5743 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5744 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5748 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5752 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5759 \begin_layout Standard
5760 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5761 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5762 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5764 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5765 you read all of section
5766 \begin_inset space ~
5770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5772 reference "sec:Nesting"
5779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5781 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5800 \begin_layout Standard
5801 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5805 paragraph environment.
5806 It has the following properties:
5809 \begin_layout Itemize
5810 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5816 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5819 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5824 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 The items can have any length.
5827 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5828 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 environment inside another
5844 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5854 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 \begin_inset space ~
5863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5865 reference "sec:Nesting"
5869 for a full explanation of nesting.
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5883 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5886 \begin_layout Standard
5887 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5888 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5891 \begin_layout Itemize
5892 The label for the first level
5896 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the second level is a dash.
5905 \begin_layout Itemize
5906 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5910 \begin_layout Itemize
5911 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 Back out to the third level.
5920 \begin_layout Itemize
5921 Back to the second level.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 Back to the outermost level.
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5930 These are the default labels for an
5935 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5940 dialog in the submenu
5945 \begin_inset Index idx
5948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5954 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5958 \begin_layout Standard
5959 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5960 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5962 \begin_inset space ~
5966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5968 reference "sec:Nesting"
5975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5977 \begin_inset Index idx
5980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5989 name "sec:Enumerate"
5996 \begin_layout Standard
6001 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6002 It has these properties:
6005 \begin_layout Enumerate
6006 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6010 \begin_layout Enumerate
6011 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6015 \begin_layout Enumerate
6017 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6020 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 environment resets the counter to one.
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6043 Items can have any length.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6068 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6070 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6071 labels the four different levels in an
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 The first level of an
6083 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6092 \begin_layout Enumerate
6093 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6097 \begin_layout Enumerate
6098 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6107 \begin_layout Enumerate
6108 Back to the third level
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 Back to the second level.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 Back to the outermost level.
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6126 environment, see section
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6133 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6138 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6142 \begin_layout Standard
6143 There is more to nesting
6147 environments than we've stated here.
6148 You should read section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "sec:Nesting"
6159 to learn more about nesting.
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6164 \begin_inset Index idx
6167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6176 \begin_layout Standard
6177 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6181 list has no fixed label.
6182 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6191 of the first line as the label.
6195 \begin_layout Description
6196 Example: This is an example of the
6203 \begin_layout Standard
6205 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6218 it is meant that the first usage of the
6222 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6224 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6232 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6238 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6240 \begin_inset space ~
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6252 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6256 for more information.) Here is an example:
6259 \begin_layout Description
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 Example: This one shows how to use a
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6279 \begin_layout Description
6280 Usage: You should use the
6284 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6285 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6287 It's not a good idea to use a
6291 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6292 You're better off using
6304 paragraphs into them.
6307 \begin_layout Description
6308 Nesting: You can nest
6312 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6317 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6318 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6319 them from the first line.
6322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6324 \begin_inset Index idx
6327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6336 \begin_layout Standard
6341 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6342 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6355 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6357 Here are its properties:
6360 \begin_layout Labeling
6361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6363 \begin_inset space ~
6366 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6375 of each line as the item label.
6380 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6381 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6382 space as described above.
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6388 uses different margins for the item label and the
6389 body of the item text.
6390 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6391 label width plus a little extra space.
6395 \begin_layout Labeling
6396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6401 width \SpecialChar LyX
6402 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6403 If the label width is larger, the label
6404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6411 into the first line.
6412 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6413 margin of the rest of the item text.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6419 \begin_inset space ~
6422 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6427 environment has the same left margin.
6428 \begin_inset Newline newline
6431 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6441 dialog (toolbar button
6444 arg "layout-paragraph"
6451 \begin_inset space ~
6456 determines the default label width.
6457 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6466 multiple times instead.
6467 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6477 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6480 \begin_inset space ~
6485 every time you alter a label in a
6490 \begin_inset Newline newline
6493 The predefined default width is the length of
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 list the same way as the
6517 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6523 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6532 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6533 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6541 reference "sec:Nesting"
6545 to learn about nesting.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 There is yet another feature of the
6553 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6554 left-justifies the item labels by
6556 You can use additional
6560 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6561 justifies the item label.
6566 are documented in section
6567 \begin_inset space ~
6571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6573 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6578 Here are some examples:
6581 \begin_layout Labeling
6582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6583 Left The default for
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6599 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6602 \begin_layout Labeling
6603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6615 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6618 \begin_layout Subsection
6620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6622 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6627 \begin_inset Index idx
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6640 The features described in this section require that the module
6642 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6644 is loaded in the document settings.
6645 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 -packages ! enumitem
6664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6665 Custom Enumerate Lists
6666 \begin_inset Index idx
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6678 \begin_layout Standard
6680 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6686 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6687 There you add the command
6690 \begin_layout Standard
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6711 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6712 Code, look at section
6713 \begin_inset space ~
6717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6719 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6733 \change_inserted 1414654397 1468603336
6735 \change_deleted 1414654397 1468603338
6738 the first level counter of the enumeration.
6745 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6746 For capital Roman numerals replace
6758 in the command above.
6759 For Arabic numerals use
6767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6774 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 You can only number 26
6800 \begin_inset space ~
6803 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6813 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6816 \begin_layout Standard
6817 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6820 \begin_layout Enumerate
6821 \begin_inset Argument 1
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6850 \begin_layout Enumerate
6851 \begin_inset Argument 1
6854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_layout Enumerate
6882 \begin_layout Enumerate
6883 \begin_inset Argument 1
6886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 \begin_layout Enumerate
6911 \begin_inset Argument 1
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6941 For this list these commands were used:
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6955 \begin_inset Newline newline
6963 \begin_inset Newline newline
6971 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_layout Standard
6988 makes the label emphasized and
6997 \begin_layout Standard
6998 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7006 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7007 lists until you change the definition.
7015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7017 \begin_inset Index idx
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7021 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7029 \begin_layout Standard
7030 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7033 \begin_layout Enumerate
7034 \begin_inset Argument 1
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7056 \begin_inset Note Note
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7060 goes back to default numbering
7068 \begin_layout Enumerate
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7076 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7086 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7087 to indicate that it is a resumed
7088 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7089 , but in the output.
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7113 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7114 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7115 of a normal enumeration.
7116 There, insert the command
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7130 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7134 \begin_layout Enumerate
7138 \begin_layout Enumerate
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7143 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7146 \begin_layout Enumerate
7147 \begin_inset Argument 1
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 This enumeration starts at 4
7169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7171 \begin_inset Index idx
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7184 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7186 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7189 \begin_layout Itemize
7193 \begin_layout Itemize
7194 with standard spacing
7197 \begin_layout Standard
7198 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7200 Add there the command
7204 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7208 \begin_inset Argument 1
7211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7230 \begin_layout Itemize
7234 \begin_layout Itemize
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7239 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7246 \begin_inset Index idx
7249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7251 -packages ! enumitem
7257 For more information see its documentation,
7258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7267 \begin_layout Standard
7268 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7270 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7271 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7275 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7278 \begin_layout Enumerate
7279 \begin_inset Argument 1
7282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7290 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 with negative indentation
7307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7308 Further Customization
7309 \begin_inset Index idx
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7313 Lists ! Customization
7321 \begin_layout Standard
7322 You can also change the style of description lists.
7326 \begin_layout Standard
7332 \begin_layout Standard
7333 changes the description label font, the command
7336 \begin_layout Standard
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7343 sets the list style.
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 An example where the command
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7355 itshape, style=nextline
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7362 \begin_layout Description
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7368 \begin_inset Argument 1
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7377 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7379 itshape, style=nextline
7389 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7390 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7394 \begin_layout Description
7396 \begin_inset space ~
7399 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7400 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7401 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7404 \begin_layout Standard
7405 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7411 \begin_inset Index idx
7414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7416 -packages ! enumitem
7422 For more information see its documentation
7423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7432 \begin_layout Subsection
7434 \begin_inset Index idx
7437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7446 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7448 \begin_inset space ~
7451 Address: An Overview
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7455 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7456 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7464 \begin_inset space ~
7470 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7471 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7472 gags on the document.
7473 In contrast, you can use the
7480 \begin_inset space ~
7485 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7486 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7490 \begin_layout Standard
7491 Of course, you're not limited to using
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7512 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7513 some European academic papers.
7516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7520 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7532 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7533 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7537 \begin_inset space ~
7542 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7543 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7544 Here's an example of each:
7547 \begin_layout Right Address
7549 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 \begin_inset Newline newline
7557 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 When is it? What is today?
7563 \begin_layout Standard
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7573 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7575 the largest block of text on a single line.
7576 Here's an example of the
7583 \begin_layout Address
7585 \begin_inset Newline newline
7588 Where do I send this
7589 \begin_inset Newline newline
7592 Your post office and country
7595 \begin_layout Standard
7596 As you can see, both
7603 \begin_inset space ~
7608 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7613 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7614 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7620 This makes sense, since
7628 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7629 Thus, you have to use
7636 arg "newline-insert newline"
7641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7642 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7644 \begin_inset space ~
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7653 ) to start a new line in an
7660 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_layout Subsection
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7674 or list of references.
7676 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7681 \begin_inset Index idx
7684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7698 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7699 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7700 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7701 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7715 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7716 The book document classes ignores the
7720 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7724 in a letter document class.
7727 \begin_layout Standard
7732 environment does several things for you.
7733 First, it puts the centered label
7734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7742 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7744 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7745 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7746 the subsequent text.
7747 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7749 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7754 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7758 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7759 The new paragraph will still be in the
7764 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7765 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 \begin_inset Float figure
7774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7776 \begin_inset Graphics
7777 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7785 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7790 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7811 \begin_layout Standard
7812 We would love to demonstrate the
7816 environment, but since this document is in the
7817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7824 class, we can't do this.
7825 We inserted it therefore as figure
7826 \begin_inset space ~
7830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7832 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7837 If you have never heard of an
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7845 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7850 \begin_inset Index idx
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7862 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7869 \begin_layout Standard
7874 environment is used to list references.
7875 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7876 only use it at the end of the document.
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7889 When you first open a
7893 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7894 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7910 depending on the document class.
7911 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7912 Each paragraph of the
7916 environment is a bibliography entry.
7921 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7922 Each new paragraph is still in the
7929 \begin_layout Standard
7930 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7931 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7933 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7935 handling, have a look at section
7936 \begin_inset space ~
7940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7942 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7949 \begin_layout Subsection
7950 Special Environments
7953 \begin_layout Standard
7955 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7956 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7964 \begin_inset Index idx
7967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7977 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7990 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7992 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7997 key as a fixed whitespace.
8001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8014 \begin_inset space ~
8019 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8037 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8040 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8043 arg "newline-insert newline"
8060 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8061 So, when you finish using the
8066 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8067 Also, you can nest the
8072 environment inside of others.
8075 \begin_layout Standard
8076 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8079 \begin_layout Itemize
8083 arg "newline-insert newline"
8086 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8091 \begin_inset space \space{}
8101 arg "newline-insert newline"
8107 \begin_layout Itemize
8111 arg "newline-insert newline"
8121 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8128 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8129 You must put at least one
8133 in any line you want blank.
8134 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8138 \begin_layout Itemize
8139 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8143 since that will insert
8148 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8151 arg "self-insert \""
8157 \begin_layout Standard
8161 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8165 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8169 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8173 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8177 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8178 printf("Hello World!
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8192 This is just the standard
8193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8204 \begin_layout Standard
8210 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8212 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8213 as if you used a typewriter.
8214 \begin_inset Index idx
8217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8218 Paragraph environments|)
8223 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8226 Program Code Listings
8231 \begin_inset space ~
8239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8243 \begin_inset Index idx
8246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8255 \begin_layout Standard
8260 environment is similar to the
8265 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8266 computer console text.
8271 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8285 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8286 you can have empty lines.
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 have a certain language and a text style
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8305 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8306 and \SpecialChar TeX
8310 \begin_layout Standard
8311 Because of these properties
8315 works like a typewriter.
8319 \begin_layout Verbatim
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 The following 2 lines are empty:
8331 \begin_layout Verbatim
8335 \begin_layout Verbatim
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8346 \begin_layout Standard
8351 environment is identical to
8355 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8356 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8363 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8368 \begin_layout Section
8369 Nesting Environments
8370 \begin_inset Index idx
8373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8374 Nesting ! Environments
8380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8389 \begin_layout Subsection
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8395 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8397 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8399 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8401 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8413 \begin_layout Enumerate
8417 \begin_layout Enumerate
8422 \begin_layout Enumerate
8426 \begin_layout Enumerate
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8435 \begin_layout Standard
8436 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8437 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8439 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8441 \begin_inset space ~
8445 \begin_inset space ~
8453 \begin_inset space ~
8457 \begin_inset space ~
8462 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8464 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8467 arg "depth-increment"
8473 arg "depth-decrement"
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8497 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8498 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8502 \begin_layout Standard
8503 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8504 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8505 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8506 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8507 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8513 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8515 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8518 \begin_layout Subsection
8519 What You Can and Can't Nest
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8524 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8529 than a simple yes or no.
8530 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8534 Completely unnestable
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8538 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8549 environments have them:
8552 \begin_layout Description
8553 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8554 Can't nest into them.
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Description
8591 \begin_inset space ~
8594 Nestable You can nest them.
8595 You can nest other things into them.
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Itemize
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Description
8662 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8663 You can't nest anything into them.
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_inset space ~
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8762 \begin_layout Standard
8763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8771 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8781 \begin_inset space ~
8784 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8785 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8786 nested section headings violate this.
8794 \begin_layout Subsection
8795 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8796 \begin_inset Index idx
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8800 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8808 \begin_layout Standard
8809 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8810 affected by nesting anyhow.
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8836 Figures and tables in
8840 are not affected by this.
8845 Have a look at section
8846 \begin_inset space ~
8850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8852 reference "sec:Floats"
8856 for more information about
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8865 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8866 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8871 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8879 of its own, it behaves just like a
8880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8887 paragraph environment.
8888 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 Here's an example with a table:
8896 \begin_layout Enumerate
8901 \begin_layout Enumerate
8902 This is (a) and it's nested.
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8913 \begin_layout Standard
8915 \begin_inset Tabular
8916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8917 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9013 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9017 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9022 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 This is (a) and it's nested.
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9036 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9042 \begin_layout Standard
9044 \begin_inset Tabular
9045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9046 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9133 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9139 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9149 \begin_layout Enumerate
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9154 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9162 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 This is (a) and it's nested.
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9181 \begin_layout Standard
9183 \begin_inset Tabular
9184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9272 \begin_layout Standard
9273 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9279 \begin_layout Enumerate
9281 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9288 \begin_layout Enumerate
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9299 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9300 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9304 \begin_layout Subsection
9305 Usage and General Features
9308 \begin_layout Standard
9309 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9310 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9319 is the innermost possible depth.
9320 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9323 \begin_layout Enumerate
9324 level #1 – outermost
9328 \begin_layout Enumerate
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 \begin_layout Itemize
9348 \begin_layout Itemize
9357 \begin_layout Standard
9358 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9359 both of them in the example.
9360 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9370 For example, if we tried to nest another
9375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9382 , we would get errors.
9385 \begin_layout Subsection
9387 \begin_inset Index idx
9390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9399 \begin_layout Standard
9400 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9401 We have several examples of nested environments.
9402 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9407 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9410 \begin_layout Labeling
9411 \labelwidthstring MMM
9412 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9421 \begin_layout Labeling
9422 \labelwidthstring MMM
9423 #2-a This is level #2.
9424 We created it by using
9427 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9433 arg "depth-increment"
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #3-a This is level #3.
9443 This time, we just enter
9450 arg "depth-increment"
9454 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9458 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9464 arg "depth-increment"
9471 \begin_layout Standard
9476 environment, nested inside of
9477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9485 So, it's at level #4.
9486 We did this by entering
9489 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9495 arg "depth-increment"
9498 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9503 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9519 \begin_layout Standard
9524 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9527 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9533 \begin_layout Labeling
9534 \labelwidthstring MMM
9535 #4-a This is level #4.
9539 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9542 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9547 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9551 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9556 keep nesting things inside
9557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9575 \begin_layout Labeling
9576 \labelwidthstring MMM
9577 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9578 and this is level #6.
9579 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-b Back to level #5.
9589 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9595 arg "depth-decrement"
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9607 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9613 arg "depth-decrement"
9616 , we're back at level #4.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #3-b Back to level #3.
9623 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #2-b Back to level #2.
9634 \begin_layout Labeling
9635 \labelwidthstring MMM
9636 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9637 After this sentence, we will enter
9641 and change the paragraph environment back to
9648 \begin_layout Standard
9649 We could have also used the
9665 environment in place of the
9670 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9674 Example 2: Inheritance
9677 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9678 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9681 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9690 arg "depth-increment"
9694 \begin_inset Newline newline
9697 which, we will change to the
9705 \begin_layout Enumerate
9710 environment, at level #2.
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9714 Notice how the nested
9718 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9722 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9727 We ended this example by entering
9732 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9736 and reset the nesting depth by using
9739 arg "depth-decrement"
9745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9746 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9755 \begin_inset Argument 1
9758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9759 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 This is level #1, in an
9772 paragraph environment.
9773 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9777 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9788 arg "depth-increment"
9792 Now, what happens if we nest an
9796 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9797 label be? An asterisk?
9801 \begin_layout Itemize
9811 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9812 So, its label is a bullet.
9813 (We got here by using
9816 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9822 arg "depth-increment"
9825 , then changing the environment to
9833 \begin_layout Itemize
9834 Here's level #4, produced using
9837 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9843 arg "depth-increment"
9847 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9852 \begin_layout Enumerate
9855 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9860 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9864 , because we are in the
9872 environment (that is, it is an
9887 \begin_layout Enumerate
9892 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9893 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9897 \begin_layout Enumerate
9898 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9901 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9904 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 arg "depth-decrement"
9914 to decrease the depth after the next
9917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9934 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9948 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9953 reset the counter for the label.
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 arg "depth-decrement"
9970 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9971 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9972 into the twofold-nested
9980 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 The same thing happens if we do another
9984 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9990 arg "depth-decrement"
9993 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9996 \begin_layout Standard
9997 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10002 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10013 The number of other
10017 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10024 The same rule applies for the
10028 environment, as well.
10031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10032 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10035 \begin_layout Enumerate
10036 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10037 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10038 the same detail with how we did it.
10047 \begin_layout Standard
10055 arg "depth-increment"
10062 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10063 the example in parentheses someplace.
10064 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10065 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10066 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10070 \begin_layout Enumerate
10075 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10079 \begin_layout Verse
10080 Now we will add verse.
10081 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 It will get much worse.
10085 \begin_inset Newline newline
10095 arg "depth-increment"
10105 \begin_layout Verse
10106 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10107 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10111 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Here comes a table:
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10131 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10137 \begin_layout Standard
10139 \begin_inset Tabular
10140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10141 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10228 \begin_layout Verse
10232 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10242 arg "depth-increment"
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10254 \begin_inset Newline newline
10262 arg "depth-decrement"
10269 \begin_layout Enumerate
10274 : level #1) This is another item.
10275 Note that selecting a
10279 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10280 3 times to put the table inside the
10288 \begin_layout Quotation
10289 We're now ending the
10293 list and changing to
10298 We're still at level #1.
10299 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10300 The next set of paragraphs is a
10301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10308 We will nest both the
10315 \begin_inset space ~
10320 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10324 for the letter body.
10328 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10331 to preserve the depth.
10332 Remember that you need to use
10335 arg "newline-insert newline"
10338 to create multiple lines inside the
10345 \begin_inset space ~
10355 \begin_layout Right Address
10357 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10361 \begin_inset Newline newline
10367 \begin_layout Address
10369 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Quotation
10376 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10380 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10381 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10382 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10383 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10384 as soon as possible.
10385 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10388 \begin_layout Quotation
10389 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10390 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10391 with your order, along with payment.
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We thank you again for your patience.
10398 \begin_layout Address
10400 \begin_inset Newline newline
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 That ends that example!
10411 \begin_layout Standard
10412 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10413 gives you a lot of power with just
10415 We could have easily nested an
10436 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10439 \begin_layout Subsection
10441 \begin_inset Index idx
10444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10445 Nesting ! Separation
10451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10453 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10460 \begin_layout Standard
10461 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10463 For example you need two different enumerations:
10466 \begin_layout Enumerate
10471 \begin_layout Enumerate
10476 \begin_layout Enumerate
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 \begin_inset Separator plain
10487 \begin_layout Itemize
10493 \begin_layout Standard
10494 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10500 \begin_layout Enumerate
10504 \begin_layout Enumerate
10508 \begin_layout Enumerate
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10514 list item and use the menu
10516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10517 Start New Environment
10520 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10521 ) and behind it the new list.
10524 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10525 Start New Parent Environment
10527 only appears if the item is nested.
10528 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10534 (red arrow in LyX).
10535 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10536 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10539 \begin_layout Standard
10540 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10543 arg "paragraph-break"
10550 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10553 \begin_layout Section
10554 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10555 \begin_inset Index idx
10558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10569 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10571 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10572 be broken at the end of a line.
10573 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10577 \begin_layout Subsection
10579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10581 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10586 \begin_inset Index idx
10589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10598 \begin_layout Standard
10599 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10600 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10601 ) not to break the line at
10603 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10606 \begin_layout Quote
10607 Further documentation is given in section
10608 \begin_inset Newline newline
10612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10614 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10638 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 A protected space is set with
10649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10650 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10652 \begin_inset space ~
10660 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10666 \begin_layout Subsection
10668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10670 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10675 \begin_inset Index idx
10678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10679 Spacing ! Horizontal
10687 \begin_layout Standard
10688 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10695 The length units are listed in Appendix
10696 \begin_inset space ~
10700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10702 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10713 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10718 \begin_inset Index idx
10721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10722 Spaces ! Inter-word
10730 \begin_layout Standard
10731 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10732 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10733 at the ends of sentences.
10734 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10735 automatically takes care about this.
10736 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10737 followed by a period; see section
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10744 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10749 To insert a normal space, select
10751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10752 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10762 arg "space-insert normal"
10768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10772 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10777 \begin_inset Index idx
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10798 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10807 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10808 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10809 inside abbreviations:
10812 \begin_layout Quote
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10818 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10821 \begin_layout Standard
10822 or between values and units.
10823 Compare for example this:
10824 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10832 \begin_inset Newline newline
10835 10 kg (normal space
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10842 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10852 arg "space-insert thin"
10858 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10862 \begin_layout Standard
10863 You can also insert the following space types:
10866 \begin_layout Description
10868 \begin_inset space ~
10872 \begin_inset space ~
10875 space A line with a
10876 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10880 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10884 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10887 negative thin space between the arrows.
10890 \begin_layout Description
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10896 \begin_inset space ~
10899 space A line with a
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10904 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10908 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10911 negative medium space between the arrows.
10914 \begin_layout Description
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10920 \begin_inset space ~
10923 space A line with a
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10928 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10932 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10935 negative thick space between the arrows.
10938 \begin_layout Description
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10952 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10956 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 em) space between the arrows.
10970 \begin_layout Description
10972 \begin_inset space ~
10976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10980 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10984 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10988 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10992 \begin_inset space ~
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 em) space between the arrows.
11002 \begin_layout Description
11004 \begin_inset space ~
11008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11016 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11020 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 em) space between the arrows.
11034 \begin_layout Description
11036 \begin_inset space ~
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11044 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11056 cm space between the arrows.
11059 \begin_layout Standard
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11067 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11071 lists the different space sizes.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11075 \begin_inset Float table
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11086 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Tabular
11101 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11102 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11220 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11379 \begin_inset Index idx
11382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11393 feature for adding extra space
11394 in a uniform fashion.
11395 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11396 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11397 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11398 equally between themselves.
11401 \begin_layout Standard
11402 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11405 \begin_layout Quote
11407 This is on the left side
11408 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11411 This is on the right
11414 \begin_layout Quote
11417 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11421 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_layout Quote
11430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11445 That was an example in the
11451 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11462 is one in a standard paragraph.
11463 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11467 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11470 \begin_layout Standard
11471 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11474 \begin_inset space ~
11479 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11482 \begin_layout Standard
11484 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11488 \begin_inset space ~
11494 \begin_layout Standard
11496 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11506 \begin_layout Standard
11508 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11512 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_layout Standard
11520 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11524 \begin_inset space ~
11530 \begin_layout Standard
11532 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11536 \begin_inset space ~
11542 \begin_layout Standard
11544 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11548 \begin_inset space ~
11554 \begin_layout Standard
11555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11563 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11567 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11569 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11570 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11574 option in the space dialog.
11582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11586 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11591 \begin_inset Index idx
11594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11603 \begin_layout Standard
11604 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11605 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11608 \begin_layout Standard
11609 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11612 What is correct English?:
11613 \begin_inset Newline newline
11617 \begin_inset Newline newline
11621 \begin_inset space ~
11624 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11625 \begin_inset Newline newline
11629 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11661 \begin_layout Standard
11663 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset space ~
11676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11680 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11683 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11687 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset space ~
11701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11704 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11713 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11714 That is why it is named
11715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11724 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11728 \begin_layout Subsection
11730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11732 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11737 \begin_inset Index idx
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11749 \begin_layout Standard
11750 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11753 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11755 \begin_inset space ~
11761 There you find the following sizes:
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11777 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11778 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11783 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11794 \begin_inset Index idx
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11798 Document ! Settings
11803 for the paragraph separation.
11804 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11821 \begin_inset Index idx
11824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11830 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11831 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11836 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11837 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11846 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 s are described in section
11856 \begin_inset space ~
11860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11862 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11871 If there are several
11875 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11876 You can therefore use
11880 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11888 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11889 \begin_inset space ~
11893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11895 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11903 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11913 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11914 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11926 \begin_layout Subsection
11927 Paragraph Alignment
11928 \begin_inset Index idx
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 Paragraph ! Alignment
11940 \begin_layout Standard
11941 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11943 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11946 dialog (toolbar button
11949 arg "layout-paragraph"
11953 There are five possibilities:
11956 \begin_layout Itemize
11964 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11970 \begin_layout Itemize
11978 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11984 \begin_layout Itemize
11992 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11998 \begin_layout Itemize
12006 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12012 \begin_layout Itemize
12020 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12027 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12028 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12029 the left and right margins.
12030 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 This paragraph is right aligned,
12038 \begin_layout Standard
12040 this one is centered,
12043 \begin_layout Standard
12045 this one is left aligned.
12048 \begin_layout Subsection
12050 \begin_inset Index idx
12053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12054 Page breaks ! Forced
12060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12062 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12071 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12072 force a page break where you want one.
12073 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 is good at page breaking.
12075 Only if you use a lot of
12079 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12080 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12083 \begin_layout Standard
12084 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12085 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12089 have to change the page breaking.
12092 \begin_layout Standard
12093 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12095 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12098 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12100 \begin_inset space ~
12106 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12109 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12111 \begin_inset space ~
12116 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12118 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12119 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12124 at the top of a page.
12125 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12127 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12128 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12129 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12133 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12137 to learn more about
12144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12148 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12153 \begin_inset Index idx
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12157 Page breaks ! Clear
12165 \begin_layout Standard
12166 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12167 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12168 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12169 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12170 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12173 \begin_layout Standard
12174 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12177 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12179 \begin_inset space ~
12185 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12188 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12190 \begin_inset space ~
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12199 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12200 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12203 \begin_layout Subsection
12205 \begin_inset Index idx
12208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12217 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12224 \begin_layout Standard
12225 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12227 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12230 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12232 \begin_inset space ~
12236 \begin_inset space ~
12244 arg "newline-insert newline"
12248 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12265 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12268 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12270 This is useful to avoid
12271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12278 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12281 \begin_layout Standard
12282 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12283 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12285 very good at line breaking.
12286 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12287 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12288 \begin_inset space ~
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Quote"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Verse"
12306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12308 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12315 \begin_layout Subsection
12317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12319 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12324 \begin_inset Index idx
12327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12336 \begin_layout Standard
12338 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12349 \begin_layout Standard
12353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12354 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12356 \begin_inset space ~
12361 you can insert horizontal lines.
12362 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12363 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12364 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12367 \begin_layout Standard
12369 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12380 \begin_layout Section
12381 Characters and Symbols
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12385 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12386 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12387 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12395 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12399 for information on how this is done.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12408 dialog via the menu
12410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12411 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12426 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12427 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12429 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12437 \begin_layout Section
12438 Fonts and Text Styles
12439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12441 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12448 \begin_layout Subsection
12450 \begin_inset Index idx
12453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12462 \begin_layout Standard
12463 There are two types of fonts:
12466 \begin_layout Description
12468 \begin_inset space ~
12472 \begin_inset Index idx
12475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12486 characters) in the font.
12487 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12488 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12489 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12490 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12491 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12492 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12493 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12497 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12498 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12499 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12500 sizes than at small ones.
12501 \begin_inset Newline newline
12515 \begin_inset space ~
12523 \begin_layout Description
12525 \begin_inset space ~
12529 \begin_inset Index idx
12532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12538 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12539 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12540 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12541 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12542 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12543 image manipulation program.
12544 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12545 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12549 pixels high up to 34
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12553 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12554 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12555 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12557 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12558 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12559 \begin_inset Newline newline
12562 Bitmap fonts are named
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12570 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12573 \begin_layout Standard
12574 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12575 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12576 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12577 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12578 use scalable fonts.
12581 \begin_layout Standard
12582 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12585 \begin_layout Standard
12586 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12587 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12588 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12589 font to emphasize text, you use an
12590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12598 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12600 In \SpecialChar LyX
12601 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12605 \begin_layout Subsection
12608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12610 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12618 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12619 used its own fonts.
12620 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12621 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12626 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12627 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12628 to a word processor.
12629 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12630 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12631 files are very portable across
12632 different machines.
12633 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 has increased a lot
12635 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12638 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12640 \begin_inset space ~
12644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12646 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12651 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 code in the document
12653 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12657 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 engines that are also able directly
12659 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12661 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12663 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12665 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12666 that is installed on your system.
12667 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12679 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12680 es; so you might have to experiment.
12688 \begin_layout Subsection
12689 Document Font and Font size
12690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12692 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12697 \begin_inset Index idx
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12707 \begin_inset Index idx
12710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12719 \begin_layout Standard
12720 You can set the document fonts in the
12722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12730 Document ! Settings
12740 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12741 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12744 \begin_inset space ~
12753 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12755 \begin_inset space ~
12758 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12761 \begin_layout Standard
12766 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12767 This requires that you use
12779 as the output format, i.
12780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12784 \begin_inset space \space{}
12787 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12788 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12789 installed (see section
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12796 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12801 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12803 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12804 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12809 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12810 cannot determine the family.
12811 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12812 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12815 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12818 \begin_layout Standard
12819 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12820 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12825 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12831 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12832 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12840 \begin_inset space ~
12846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12859 European Computer Modern
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12869 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12872 \begin_layout Standard
12881 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12882 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12887 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12890 \begin_inset space ~
12895 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12901 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12902 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12905 \begin_layout Itemize
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12914 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12932 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12933 community in order to replace
12937 as the default font.
12938 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12939 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12942 \begin_inset space ~
12955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12956 One difference is improved kerning.
12964 \begin_layout Itemize
12968 \begin_inset space ~
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12977 fonts in (the rare) case that
12980 \begin_inset space ~
12985 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13000 Virtual means that it
13001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13012 -glyphs from other fonts.
13013 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13035 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13041 \begin_inset Index idx
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13046 -packages ! aeguill
13051 with the document preamble line
13052 \begin_inset Newline newline
13059 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13060 \begin_inset Newline newline
13065 will fix the guillemet problem.
13070 and that accented characters are not
13074 glyph, but built of
13078 characters, the accent and the letter.
13079 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13085 If you search for example for the French word
13086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13093 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13102 and not for the glyph
13103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13117 \begin_layout Itemize
13118 If you do not like the look of
13126 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13147 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13151 serif and typewriter fonts,
13155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13156 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13172 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13177 \begin_inset space \space{}
13185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13189 \begin_inset space \space{}
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13213 but you can also select your own.
13214 \begin_inset Newline newline
13217 The differences between roman,
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13229 fonts are explained in section
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13236 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13241 \begin_inset Newline newline
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13252 was originally designed for newspapers.
13253 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13254 into the small newspaper columns.
13258 \begin_inset space ~
13263 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13266 \begin_layout Standard
13267 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13280 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13285 depends on the class you are using.
13286 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13289 \begin_layout Standard
13290 Note that the font size is the
13295 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13296 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13297 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13298 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13307 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13308 \begin_inset space ~
13312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13314 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13321 \begin_layout Standard
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13330 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13335 serif or typewriter.
13340 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13350 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13358 LaTeX font encoding
13360 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13361 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13367 \begin_inset Index idx
13370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13372 -packages ! fontenc
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13389 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13390 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13397 \begin_layout Standard
13398 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13400 Use Old Style Figures
13404 Use True Small Caps
13407 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13410 Use Old Style Figures
13412 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13414 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13426 Use True Small Caps
13428 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13429 of scaled capitals.
13430 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13431 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13434 \begin_layout Standard
13439 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13440 a font to display the script characters.
13444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13445 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13451 \begin_inset Index idx
13454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13461 So this has no effect for the document language
13475 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13479 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13487 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13492 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13493 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13495 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13500 dialog, see section
13501 \begin_inset space ~
13505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13507 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13519 \begin_layout Subsection
13523 \begin_layout Standard
13524 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13525 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13527 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13528 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13529 choose a math font in the dialog
13531 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13535 \begin_inset Index idx
13538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13539 Document ! Settings
13545 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13546 automatically selects a math font.
13547 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13548 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13557 \begin_inset space ~
13563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13568 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13569 document font is available.
13572 \begin_layout Standard
13573 Note that the math font will not be used for
13577 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13583 or by the insertion of the command
13590 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13595 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13596 while the math characters do not.
13598 \begin_inset space ~
13601 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13612 \begin_inset space ~
13617 in the document font settings.
13620 \begin_layout Standard
13621 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13622 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13623 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13624 font (in most cases
13625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13631 \begin_inset space ~
13637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13640 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13641 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13649 \begin_inset space ~
13655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13661 \begin_layout Subsection
13662 Using Different Character Styles
13663 \begin_inset Index idx
13666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13673 \begin_inset Index idx
13676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13685 \begin_layout Standard
13686 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13687 automatically changes the character style for certain
13688 paragraph environments.
13690 supports two character styles,
13699 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13708 style, do one of the following:
13711 \begin_layout Itemize
13712 click on the toolbar button
13721 \begin_layout Itemize
13722 use the key binding
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13732 These commands are all toggles.
13737 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13740 \begin_layout Standard
13741 One typically uses the
13745 style for proper names.
13747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13754 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13763 A more widely used character style is the
13768 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13775 \begin_layout Itemize
13776 clicking on the toolbar button
13785 \begin_layout Itemize
13786 using the keybindings
13795 \begin_layout Standard
13800 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13802 use a different font.
13805 \begin_layout Standard
13806 We've been using the
13810 style all over the place in this document.
13811 Here's one more example:
13814 \begin_layout Quotation
13817 Do not overuse character styles!
13820 \begin_layout Standard
13821 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13822 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13823 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13824 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13828 \begin_layout Standard
13829 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13839 \begin_inset space ~
13842 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13848 arg "dialog-show character"
13854 \begin_layout Subsection
13855 Fine-Tuning with the
13860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13862 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13867 \begin_inset Index idx
13870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13879 \begin_layout Standard
13880 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13882 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13883 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13884 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13885 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13886 from ordinary dialog.
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13890 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13891 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13892 \begin_inset Newline newline
13895 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13896 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13899 \begin_layout Standard
13900 To use custom character styles, open the
13902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13907 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13910 dialog or press the toolbar button
13913 arg "dialog-show character"
13917 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13918 font property that you can choose.
13919 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13927 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13932 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13933 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13934 environments all at once.
13937 \begin_layout Standard
13938 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13941 \begin_inset space ~
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13968 The possible options are:
13972 \begin_layout Labeling
13973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 This is the Roman font family.
13979 Normally a serif font.
13980 It's also the default family.
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13995 \begin_inset space ~
14002 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14014 \begin_layout Labeling
14015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14022 This is the Typewriter font family.
14028 arg "font-typewriter"
14037 \begin_layout Labeling
14038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14043 This corresponds to the print weight.
14048 \begin_layout Labeling
14049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14054 This is the Medium font series.
14055 It's also the default series.
14058 \begin_layout Labeling
14059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14066 This is the Bold font series.
14079 \begin_layout Labeling
14080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14085 As the name implies.
14090 \begin_layout Labeling
14091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14096 This is the Upright font shape.
14097 It's also the default shape.
14100 \begin_layout Labeling
14101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14115 s the Italic font shape
14121 \begin_layout Labeling
14122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14129 This is the Slanted font shape
14131 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14132 , this is different from italic).
14135 \begin_layout Labeling
14136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14140 \begin_inset space ~
14147 This is the Small caps font shape
14154 \begin_layout Labeling
14155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14160 Alters the text color.
14161 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14165 \begin_inset space ~
14170 , which means that the document default color set in
14172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14179 \begin_inset space ~
14184 is used, you can choose between
14261 \begin_inset Index idx
14264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14273 \begin_layout Labeling
14274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14279 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14280 the language of the document.
14281 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14282 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14284 \begin_inset Newline newline
14287 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14289 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14290 When using the spell checking (see section
14291 \begin_inset space ~
14295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14297 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14301 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14304 \begin_layout Labeling
14305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14310 Alters the size of the font.
14311 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14312 proportional to the document font size.
14313 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14314 the details, but a general description of what
14320 \begin_layout Labeling
14321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14342 arg "font-size tiny"
14348 \begin_layout Labeling
14349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14370 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14376 \begin_layout Labeling
14377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14398 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14404 \begin_layout Labeling
14405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14426 arg "font-size small"
14432 \begin_layout Labeling
14433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14447 It's also the default size.
14451 arg "font-size normal"
14457 \begin_layout Labeling
14458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14479 arg "font-size large"
14485 \begin_layout Labeling
14486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14507 arg "font-size larger"
14513 \begin_layout Labeling
14514 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14535 arg "font-size largest"
14541 \begin_layout Labeling
14542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14563 arg "font-size huge"
14569 \begin_layout Labeling
14570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14591 arg "font-size giant"
14597 \begin_layout Labeling
14598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14603 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14623 arg "font-size increase"
14629 \begin_layout Labeling
14630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14635 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14655 arg "font-size decrease"
14662 \begin_layout Standard
14667 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14668 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14670 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14671 — use those instead.
14672 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14675 \begin_layout Labeling
14676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14681 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14686 \begin_layout Labeling
14687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14694 This is text with emphasize on
14697 This might seem like the same as
14701 , but it is actually a bit different.
14707 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14709 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14712 \begin_layout Labeling
14713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14720 This is text with Underbar on.
14726 arg "font-underline"
14732 \begin_inset Newline newline
14737 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14738 when you could not change fonts.
14739 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14740 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14741 because some people
14745 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14748 \begin_layout Labeling
14749 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14753 \begin_inset space ~
14760 This is text with Double underbar on.
14766 arg "font-underunderline"
14770 \begin_inset Newline newline
14773 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14774 about double underbar.
14777 \begin_layout Labeling
14778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14782 \begin_inset space ~
14789 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14795 arg "font-underwave"
14799 \begin_inset Newline newline
14802 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14803 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14806 \begin_layout Labeling
14807 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14814 This is text with Strikeout on.
14820 arg "font-strikeout"
14824 \begin_inset Newline newline
14827 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14828 changed in the meantime.
14831 \begin_layout Labeling
14832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14839 This is text with Noun on.
14846 , this is a logical attribute.
14847 Normally it's equivalent to
14850 \begin_inset space ~
14859 \begin_layout Standard
14860 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14861 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14865 \begin_inset space ~
14868 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14874 arg "dialog-show character"
14877 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14878 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14881 arg "textstyle-apply"
14885 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14889 \begin_layout Standard
14890 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14897 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14898 (suppose you just set the shape to
14899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14917 \begin_inset space ~
14929 \begin_layout Standard
14930 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14950 \begin_layout Itemize
14956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14963 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 \begin_inset Newline newline
14985 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14999 \begin_inset Note Note
15002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15003 For more on phantoms see section
15004 \begin_inset space ~
15008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15010 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15020 \begin_inset Newline newline
15026 \begin_layout Itemize
15031 fonts use characters with serifs.
15032 These are the small
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15041 The following example shows the difference:
15042 \begin_inset Newline newline
15046 \begin_inset Newline newline
15051 text without serifs
15054 \begin_inset Newline newline
15057 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15058 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15065 \begin_layout Itemize
15070 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15071 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15072 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15075 \begin_layout Standard
15076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15083 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15084 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15087 \begin_inset space ~
15092 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15093 the property to be removed.
15094 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15095 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15096 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15114 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15115 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15123 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15127 \begin_inset space ~
15132 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15143 If you, for example, set
15144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15162 \begin_inset space ~
15167 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15176 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15179 \begin_layout Standard
15180 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15181 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15184 \begin_layout Section
15185 Printing and Previewing
15188 \begin_layout Subsection
15192 \begin_layout Standard
15193 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15194 using \SpecialChar LyX
15195 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15196 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15197 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15198 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15200 Additional Features
15205 \begin_layout Standard
15207 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15210 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15211 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15212 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15215 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15216 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 to turn your writing into printable output.
15219 This happens in two stages:
15222 \begin_layout Enumerate
15223 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15224 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15226 a file with the extension,
15227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15241 \begin_layout Enumerate
15242 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15243 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15244 to use the commands in the
15248 file to produce printable output.
15251 \begin_layout Subsection
15252 Output file formats
15253 \begin_inset Index idx
15256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15265 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15273 Simple text (ASCII)
15274 \begin_inset Index idx
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15278 File formats ! ASCII
15286 \begin_layout Standard
15287 This file type has the extension
15288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15300 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15304 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15311 \begin_layout Standard
15312 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15314 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15315 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15317 \begin_inset space ~
15323 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15324 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15325 bibliography (section
15326 \begin_inset space ~
15330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15332 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15337 If your document includes such material, use
15339 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15340 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15342 \begin_inset space ~
15346 \begin_inset space ~
15350 \begin_inset space ~
15358 \begin_inset space ~
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15368 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15369 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15375 \begin_inset Index idx
15378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15379 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15388 \begin_layout Standard
15389 This file type has the extension
15390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15401 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15404 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15406 -Errors or to process it manually
15407 with console commands.
15408 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15410 's temporary directory whenever you
15411 view or export your document.
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15416 -file using the menu
15418 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15419 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15423 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 export variants are explained in section
15425 \begin_inset space ~
15429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15431 reference "subsec:Export"
15438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15440 \begin_inset Index idx
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15452 \begin_layout Standard
15453 This file type has the extension
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15474 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15475 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15476 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15482 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15483 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15484 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15485 when you view the DVI.
15486 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15489 \begin_layout Standard
15490 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 \begin_inset space ~
15507 The latter option uses the program
15509 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15515 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15519 font access (see section
15520 \begin_inset space ~
15524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15526 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15531 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15532 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15539 \begin_inset Index idx
15542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15543 File formats ! PostScript
15551 \begin_layout Standard
15552 This file type has the extension
15553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15565 PostScript was developed by the company
15569 as a printer language.
15570 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15572 PostScript can be seen as a
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15576 programming language
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15585 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15592 \begin_inset Index idx
15595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15597 -packages ! pstricks
15607 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15610 \begin_layout Standard
15611 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15615 Encapsulated PostScript
15616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15619 (EPS, file extension
15620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15632 As \SpecialChar LyX
15633 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15634 convert them in the background to EPS.
15635 If, for example, you have 50
15636 \begin_inset space ~
15639 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15641 \begin_inset space ~
15644 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15645 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15647 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15648 EPS to avoid this problem.
15651 \begin_layout Standard
15652 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15663 \begin_inset Index idx
15666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15673 \begin_inset Index idx
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15685 \begin_layout Standard
15686 This file type has the extension
15687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15703 Portable Document Format
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15711 was derived from PostScript.
15712 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15721 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15722 looks exactly the same.
15725 \begin_layout Standard
15726 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15730 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15734 (JPG, file extension
15735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15762 Portable Network Graphics
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15766 (PNG, file extension
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15780 converts them in the
15781 background to one of these formats.
15782 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15783 will slow down your workflow.
15784 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15787 \begin_layout Standard
15788 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15790 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15796 \begin_layout Description
15798 \begin_inset space ~
15801 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15805 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15808 \begin_layout Description
15810 \begin_inset space ~
15817 ) This uses the program
15819 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15822 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15825 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15828 is a new engine, derived from
15832 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15833 access (see section
15834 \begin_inset space ~
15838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15840 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15846 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15851 \begin_layout Description
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15860 ) This uses the program
15865 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15871 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15872 font access (see section
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15879 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15884 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15885 vertically written Japanese.
15888 \begin_layout Description
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15893 (cropped) This is the same as
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15901 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15902 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15903 to generate good-looking
15904 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15907 \begin_layout Description
15909 \begin_inset space ~
15912 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15916 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15920 \begin_layout Description
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15925 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15929 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15930 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15934 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15935 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15938 \begin_layout Standard
15942 \begin_inset space ~
15951 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15952 works without problems.
15953 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15954 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15958 \begin_inset space ~
15966 \begin_inset space ~
15971 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15981 \begin_inset Index idx
15984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15985 FileFormats ! XHTML
15991 \begin_inset Index idx
15994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16003 \begin_layout Standard
16004 This file type has the extension
16005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16017 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16018 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16019 When \SpecialChar LyX
16020 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16021 suitable for the purpose.
16022 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16025 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 between different formats, which are described in section
16030 Math Output in XHTML
16035 \begin_inset space ~
16043 \begin_layout Standard
16044 XHTML output remains
16045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16052 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16053 features are supported yet.
16057 and the World Wide Web
16061 Additional Features
16063 manual, for more information.
16066 \begin_layout Standard
16067 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16069 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16070 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16076 \begin_layout Subsection
16078 \begin_inset Index idx
16081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16090 \begin_layout Standard
16091 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16092 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16101 or use the toolbar button
16108 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16109 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16110 \begin_inset space ~
16114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16116 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16120 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16122 \begin_inset space ~
16126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16128 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16133 Further output formats can be selected via
16135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16136 View (Other Formats)
16138 or the toolbar button
16147 \begin_layout Standard
16148 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16149 viewer window using the menu
16151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16157 Update (Other Formats)
16162 \begin_layout Standard
16163 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16166 To have a real output, export your document.
16169 \begin_layout Section
16170 A few Words about Typography
16171 \begin_inset Index idx
16174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16183 \begin_layout Subsection
16184 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16185 \begin_inset Index idx
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 \begin_inset Index idx
16198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16207 \begin_layout Standard
16208 In \SpecialChar LyX
16210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 character comes in four lengths: the
16233 , and the minus sign:
16234 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16240 \begin_layout Standard
16241 \begin_inset Tabular
16242 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16243 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16247 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16343 \begin_inset space ~
16346 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16353 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16380 \begin_inset space ~
16383 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16404 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16438 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16444 \begin_layout Standard
16445 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 character multiple times in a row.
16458 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16459 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16494 math mode and has a length of its own.
16495 Here are some examples:
16498 \begin_layout Enumerate
16499 line- and page-breaks
16500 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16510 \begin_layout Enumerate
16512 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16522 \begin_layout Enumerate
16523 Oh — there's a dash.
16524 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16534 \begin_layout Enumerate
16535 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16549 \begin_layout Subsection
16551 \begin_inset Index idx
16554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16563 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16570 \begin_layout Standard
16571 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16572 but automatically in the output.
16573 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16579 \begin_inset Index idx
16582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16589 following the rules of the document language.
16592 \begin_layout Standard
16594 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16598 font and with unusual constructs, like
16599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16607 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16608 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16609 This is done with the menu
16611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16612 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16614 \begin_inset space ~
16620 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16622 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16626 \begin_layout Standard
16627 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16628 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16639 would then see the hyphen
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16647 as a hyphenation possibility.
16648 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16649 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16650 as described in section
16652 Prevent Hyphenation
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16665 \begin_layout Subsection
16667 \begin_inset Index idx
16670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16680 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16683 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16690 \begin_layout Standard
16691 When \SpecialChar LyX
16692 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16693 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16695 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16701 appropriate amount of space.
16702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16705 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16707 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16708 gets after another word.
16711 \begin_layout Standard
16712 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16713 not work in all cases.
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16726 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16727 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 Here are some examples of
16735 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16738 \begin_layout Itemize
16743 \begin_layout Itemize
16748 \begin_layout Standard
16749 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16752 \begin_layout Itemize
16754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16758 this is too much space!
16761 \begin_layout Itemize
16766 \begin_layout Standard
16767 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16770 \begin_layout Standard
16771 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16774 \begin_layout Enumerate
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16783 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16790 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16795 \begin_inset Index idx
16798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16799 Spaces ! inter-word
16807 \begin_layout Enumerate
16811 \begin_inset space ~
16816 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16817 \begin_inset space ~
16821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16823 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16828 \begin_inset Index idx
16831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16840 \begin_layout Enumerate
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16848 \begin_inset space ~
16852 \begin_inset space ~
16859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16866 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16867 This function is also bound to
16870 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16876 \begin_layout Standard
16877 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16880 \begin_layout Itemize
16882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16886 \begin_inset space \space{}
16889 this is too much space!
16892 \begin_layout Itemize
16893 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16899 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16901 will take care of this.
16904 \begin_layout Standard
16905 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16909 \begin_inset space ~
16915 feature described in the section
16917 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16922 Additional Features
16927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16929 \begin_inset Index idx
16932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16933 Typography ! Quotes
16939 \begin_inset Index idx
16942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16973 \begin_layout Standard
16975 usually sets quotes correctly.
16976 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16977 and use a closing quote at the end.
16979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16987 The keyboard character,
16991 , generates this automatically.
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16995 You can specify what character the
16999 key produces using the submenu
17005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17009 \begin_inset Index idx
17012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17013 Document ! Settings
17023 There are six choices:
17026 \begin_layout Labeling
17027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17050 \begin_layout Labeling
17051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17054 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17058 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17063 Use quotes like ”this”
17066 \begin_layout Labeling
17067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17070 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17074 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17080 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17084 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17090 \begin_layout Labeling
17091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17094 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17098 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17104 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17114 \begin_layout Labeling
17115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17118 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17122 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17128 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17132 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17138 \begin_layout Labeling
17139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17142 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17146 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17152 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17156 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17166 arg "quote-insert single"
17172 \begin_layout Subsection
17174 \begin_inset Index idx
17177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17178 Typography ! Ligatures
17184 \begin_inset Index idx
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17218 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17225 \begin_layout Standard
17226 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17227 print them as single characters.
17228 These groups are known as
17233 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17234 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17236 Here are the standard ligatures:
17239 \begin_layout Itemize
17243 \begin_layout Itemize
17247 \begin_layout Itemize
17251 \begin_layout Itemize
17255 \begin_layout Itemize
17259 \begin_layout Standard
17260 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17263 \begin_layout Standard
17264 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17265 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17289 To break a ligature, use
17291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17294 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17312 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17329 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 \begin_layout Subsection
17339 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17341 \begin_inset Index idx
17344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17354 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17361 \begin_layout Standard
17364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17365 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17369 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17372 \begin_layout Description
17374 The name of the game.
17377 \begin_layout Description
17379 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17383 \begin_layout Description
17385 The \SpecialChar TeX
17386 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17390 \begin_layout Description
17391 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17392 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17396 \begin_layout Standard
17397 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17403 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17411 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17412 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17413 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17414 converges to the number
17415 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17418 : The actual version is
17419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17427 , the previous one was
17428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17439 \begin_layout Subsection
17441 \begin_inset Index idx
17444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 \begin_layout Standard
17454 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17455 space between two words.
17456 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17466 for units use the menu
17468 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17469 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17471 \begin_inset space ~
17479 arg "space-insert thin"
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 Here is an example to show the differences:
17489 \begin_layout Standard
17490 \begin_inset Tabular
17491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17492 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17493 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17501 \begin_inset space ~
17505 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17517 space between number and unit
17524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17533 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17545 half space between number and unit
17558 \begin_layout Subsection
17560 \begin_inset Index idx
17563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17564 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17572 \begin_layout Standard
17573 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17575 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17576 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17577 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17578 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17579 These bits of text became known as
17590 \begin_layout Standard
17591 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17592 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17593 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17594 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17595 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17596 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17597 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17598 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17599 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17600 \begin_inset Newline newline
17608 \begin_inset Newline newline
17616 \begin_inset Newline newline
17619 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17620 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17621 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17623 \begin_inset space ~
17627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17629 key "latexcompanion"
17634 \begin_inset space ~
17638 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17644 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17645 's page break mechanism.
17648 \begin_layout Chapter
17649 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17652 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17660 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17663 \begin_inset space ~
17669 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17672 \begin_layout Section
17674 \begin_inset Index idx
17677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17693 \begin_layout Standard
17695 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17698 \begin_layout Description
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17704 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17705 \begin_inset Newline newline
17709 \begin_inset Note Note
17712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17713 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17721 \begin_layout Description
17722 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17723 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17724 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17727 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17728 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17730 \begin_inset space ~
17736 \begin_inset Newline newline
17740 \begin_inset Note Comment
17743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17744 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17753 \begin_layout Description
17755 \begin_inset space ~
17758 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17759 set in the document settings under
17761 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17769 \begin_inset Newline newline
17773 \begin_inset Newline newline
17777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17787 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17792 of a comment that appears in the output.
17798 \begin_inset Newline newline
17802 \begin_inset Newline newline
17805 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17808 \begin_layout Standard
17809 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17821 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17824 \begin_layout Section
17826 \begin_inset Index idx
17829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17838 name "sec:Footnotes"
17845 \begin_layout Standard
17847 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17853 or the toolbar button
17856 arg "footnote-insert"
17868 \begin_inset Graphics
17869 filename clipart/footnote.png
17878 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17879 's representation of your footnote.
17889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17908 label, the box will
17912 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17913 Clicking on the box label again will close
17926 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17927 and click on the footnote
17942 \begin_layout Standard
17943 Here is an example footnote:
17951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17960 \begin_layout Standard
17961 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17962 position where the footnote box is placed.
17963 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17964 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17965 according to the document class.
17967 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17968 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17974 ey are described in the
17977 \begin_inset space ~
17985 \begin_layout Section
17987 \begin_inset Index idx
17990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17999 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18006 \begin_layout Standard
18007 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18009 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18018 or the toolbar button
18021 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18047 appearing within your text.
18048 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18049 's representation of your margin
18058 \begin_layout Standard
18059 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18063 \begin_inset Marginal
18066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 This is a marginal note.
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18077 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18078 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18079 pages, right on odd pages.
18082 \begin_layout Standard
18083 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18086 \begin_inset space ~
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_layout Section
18103 Graphics and Images
18104 \begin_inset Index idx
18107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18114 \begin_inset Index idx
18117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18126 name "sec:Graphics"
18133 \begin_layout Standard
18134 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18135 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18138 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18147 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18150 \begin_layout Standard
18151 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18156 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18157 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18159 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18160 \begin_inset space ~
18164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18166 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18173 \begin_layout Standard
18178 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18179 of the image in the output.
18180 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18188 \begin_inset space ~
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18201 \begin_inset space ~
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18210 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18211 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18219 \begin_layout Standard
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18227 \begin_inset space ~
18232 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18233 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18235 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18240 \begin_inset space ~
18245 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18246 with the image size is printed.
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18251 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18253 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18256 \begin_layout Standard
18258 \begin_inset Graphics
18259 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18267 \begin_layout Standard
18268 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18269 the image into a float, see section
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18276 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18283 \begin_layout Subsection
18285 \begin_inset Index idx
18288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18297 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18304 \begin_layout Standard
18305 You can insert images in any known file format.
18306 But as we explained in section
18307 \begin_inset space ~
18311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18313 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18317 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18319 therefore uses the program
18323 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18324 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18325 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18332 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18339 \begin_layout Standard
18340 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18343 \begin_layout Description
18345 \begin_inset space ~
18348 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18349 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18350 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 Graphics Interchange Format
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18358 (GIF, file extension
18359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18406 Portable Network Graphics
18407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18410 (PNG, file extension
18411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18423 \begin_inset Index idx
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18458 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18462 (JPG, file extension
18463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 \begin_inset Index idx
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18521 \begin_layout Description
18523 \begin_inset space ~
18526 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18528 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18529 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18530 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18531 \begin_inset Newline newline
18534 Scalable image formats can be
18535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18538 Scalable Vector Graphics
18539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18542 (SVG, file extension
18543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18555 \begin_inset Index idx
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18590 Encapsulated PostScript
18591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18594 (EPS, file extension
18595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18607 \begin_inset Index idx
18610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18642 Portable Document Format
18643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18646 (PDF, file extension
18647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18659 \begin_inset Index idx
18662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18677 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18678 result will not be scalable.
18679 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18693 \begin_layout Standard
18694 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18701 \begin_layout Subsection
18702 Grouping of Image Settings
18703 \begin_inset Index idx
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 Images ! Settings grouping
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18718 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18719 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18721 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18722 need to manually change each of them.
18726 \begin_layout Standard
18727 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18730 \begin_inset space ~
18734 \begin_inset space ~
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18750 \begin_inset space ~
18756 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18757 and checking the name of the desired group.
18760 \begin_layout Section
18762 \begin_inset Index idx
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18781 \begin_layout Standard
18782 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18785 arg "tabular-insert"
18790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18794 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18795 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18796 from the rest of the table.
18797 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18798 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18800 Here is an example table:
18803 \begin_layout Standard
18805 \begin_inset Tabular
18806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 \begin_layout Subsection
19015 \begin_layout Standard
19016 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19019 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19023 This brings up the table dialog.
19024 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19025 cursor is placed currently.
19026 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19027 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19028 done on all of your selection.
19031 \begin_layout Standard
19032 In addition to the table dialog, the
19035 \begin_inset space ~
19040 helps you in setting table properties.
19041 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19044 \begin_layout Standard
19048 \begin_inset space ~
19053 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19054 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19055 current cell respectively.
19056 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19058 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19059 of text, see section
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19066 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19073 \begin_layout Standard
19074 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19075 using the check box
19084 This will merge the cells to
19088 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19089 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19090 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19091 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19092 in the last row without the upper border:
19095 \begin_layout Standard
19097 \begin_inset Tabular
19098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19099 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19100 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19102 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19234 \begin_layout Standard
19235 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19236 -arguments for the table.
19237 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19238 explained in the chapter
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19251 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19252 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19253 but are visible in the output.
19256 \begin_layout Standard
19257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19265 Most DVI-viewers are
19269 able to display rotations.
19277 \begin_layout Standard
19282 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19287 adds lines for all cell borders.
19290 \begin_layout Subsection
19292 \begin_inset Index idx
19295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 Tables ! Multi-page
19302 \begin_inset Index idx
19305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19314 \begin_layout Standard
19315 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19318 \begin_inset space ~
19322 \begin_inset space ~
19330 \begin_inset space ~
19335 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19336 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19339 \begin_layout Description
19344 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19345 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19346 Except for the first page, if
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_layout Description
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19366 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19367 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19370 \begin_layout Description
19375 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19376 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19377 except for the last page, if
19380 \begin_inset space ~
19388 \begin_layout Description
19392 \begin_inset space ~
19397 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19398 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19401 \begin_layout Description
19402 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19403 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19409 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19412 \begin_inset space ~
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19421 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19422 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19423 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19429 In this context, first means first in this order:
19432 \begin_inset space ~
19444 \begin_inset space ~
19449 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19452 \begin_layout Standard
19454 \begin_inset Tabular
19455 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19456 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19457 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19458 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19459 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19460 <row endfirsthead="true">
19461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19491 <row endfirsthead="true">
19492 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19524 <row endhead="true">
19525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19555 <row endhead="true">
19556 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <row endfoot="true">
19589 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <row endlastfoot="true">
21571 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 \begin_layout Subsection
21610 \begin_inset Index idx
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21622 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21629 \begin_layout Standard
21630 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21631 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21632 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21633 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21637 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21640 \begin_layout Standard
21641 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21642 for the column in the table dialog.
21643 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21644 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21648 \begin_layout Standard
21650 \begin_inset Tabular
21651 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21652 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21653 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21654 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21655 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 This is longer now.
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21857 This is longer now.
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 \begin_layout Standard
21889 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21890 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21896 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21902 Selection with the mouse or with
21906 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21907 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21908 the selection from outside the table.
21911 \begin_layout Section
21913 \begin_inset Index idx
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21932 \begin_layout Subsection
21936 \begin_layout Standard
21937 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21938 have a fixed location.
21940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21947 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21955 \begin_inset space ~
21960 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21961 too many notes on the current page.
21964 \begin_layout Standard
21965 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21966 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21967 and pages without text.
21968 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21969 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21970 Floats are therefore numbered.
21971 Referencing is described in section
21972 \begin_inset space ~
21976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21978 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21986 To insert a float, use the menu
21988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21992 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21993 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21995 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21996 \begin_inset Index idx
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22005 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22006 paragraph within the float.
22007 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22008 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22009 left-clicking on the box label.
22010 A closed float box looks like this:
22011 \begin_inset Graphics
22012 filename clipart/float.png
22017 – a gray button with a red label.
22020 \begin_layout Standard
22021 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22023 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22026 \begin_layout Subsection
22028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22030 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22035 \begin_inset Index idx
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 Floats ! Figure floats
22047 \begin_layout Standard
22049 \begin_inset space ~
22053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22055 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22059 was created using the menu
22061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22062 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22068 arg "float-insert figure"
22072 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22081 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22085 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22086 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22088 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22090 \begin_inset space ~
22098 arg "layout-paragraph"
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22105 \begin_inset Float figure
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 \begin_inset Graphics
22113 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22128 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22132 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22145 \begin_layout Standard
22146 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22147 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22158 ) and refer to it using the menu
22160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22166 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22170 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22171 vague references like
22172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22179 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22180 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22190 For more about cross-references, see section
22191 \begin_inset space ~
22195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22197 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22204 \begin_layout Standard
22205 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22206 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22207 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22208 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22209 as described in section
22210 \begin_inset space ~
22214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22216 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22222 \begin_inset space ~
22226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22228 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22232 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22233 You can also set the images one below the other.
22235 \begin_inset space ~
22239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22241 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22248 reference "fig:Platypus"
22252 are the subfigures.
22255 \begin_layout Standard
22256 \begin_inset Float figure
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22266 \begin_inset Float figure
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22277 name "fig:Undefinable"
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 \begin_inset Graphics
22291 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22302 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22306 \begin_inset Float figure
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22317 name "fig:Platypus"
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 \begin_inset Graphics
22331 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22343 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22355 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22359 Two distorted images.
22372 \begin_layout Subsection
22374 \begin_inset Index idx
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 Floats ! Table floats
22386 \begin_layout Standard
22387 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22390 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22393 or the toolbar button
22396 arg "float-insert table"
22400 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22401 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22402 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22404 \begin_inset space ~
22408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22410 reference "tab:Table-float"
22417 \begin_layout Standard
22418 \begin_inset Float table
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22429 name "tab:Table-float"
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 \begin_inset Tabular
22444 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22445 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22446 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22599 \end{array}\right]$
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22641 \begin_layout Subsection
22643 \begin_inset Index idx
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 \begin_layout Standard
22657 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22658 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22659 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22661 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22669 \begin_inset space ~
22677 \begin_layout Section
22679 \begin_inset Index idx
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 \begin_layout Standard
22693 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22695 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22696 \begin_inset space \space{}
22703 \begin_layout Standard
22704 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22705 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22711 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22712 and its alignment within the page.
22715 \begin_layout Standard
22717 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22727 height_special "totalheight"
22732 backgroundcolor "none"
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 This is a minipage.
22739 The text is set in an italic style.
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22746 another formatting.
22754 \begin_layout Standard
22755 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22758 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22762 as described in section
22763 \begin_inset space ~
22767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22769 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22780 \begin_layout Standard
22781 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22791 height_special "totalheight"
22796 backgroundcolor "none"
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22801 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22807 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22811 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22821 height_special "totalheight"
22826 backgroundcolor "none"
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22831 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22839 \begin_layout Standard
22840 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22847 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22849 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22856 \begin_inset space ~
22864 \begin_layout Chapter
22865 Mathematical Formulas
22866 \begin_inset Index idx
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 \begin_inset Index idx
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22910 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22917 \begin_layout Standard
22918 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22923 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22926 \begin_layout Section
22928 \begin_inset Index idx
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 \begin_layout Standard
22941 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22954 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22956 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22957 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22958 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22971 \begin_inset space ~
22976 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22979 \begin_layout Standard
22980 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22981 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22984 \begin_layout Standard
22985 This is a line with an inline formula
22986 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22992 \begin_layout Standard
22993 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22994 paragraph, like this one:
22995 \begin_inset Formula
23002 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23005 \begin_layout Standard
23007 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23009 For example, typing
23010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23023 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23024 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23028 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23031 \begin_inset space ~
23039 \begin_layout Subsection
23040 Navigating in Formulas
23041 \begin_inset Index idx
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 \begin_layout Standard
23054 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23055 achieved with the arrow keys.
23057 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23058 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23063 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23064 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23068 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23072 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23075 \end{array}\right]$
23083 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23088 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23089 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23092 \begin_layout Standard
23097 , printed in this document as
23098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23102 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23109 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23110 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23111 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23116 For example, if you want
23117 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23125 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23135 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23139 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23144 , since in the latter case only the
23147 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23152 will be under the square root sign:
23153 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23159 \begin_layout Standard
23160 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23162 \begin_inset Formula
23164 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23173 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23174 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23177 \begin_layout Subsection
23181 \begin_layout Standard
23182 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23183 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23187 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23188 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23189 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23190 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23191 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23195 \begin_layout Subsection
23196 Exponents and Subscripts
23197 \begin_inset Index idx
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 \begin_inset Index idx
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 \begin_layout Standard
23220 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23223 arg "math-superscript"
23229 arg "math-subscript"
23232 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23234 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23237 , type in a formula
23240 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23250 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23256 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23260 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23266 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23272 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23281 , you have to use an extra
23285 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23286 For example, if you want
23287 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23299 Subscripts are similar: To get
23300 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23306 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23314 \begin_layout Subsection
23316 \begin_inset Index idx
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_layout Standard
23329 Create a fraction either with the command
23335 or by using the icon
23338 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23344 \begin_inset space ~
23350 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23351 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23352 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23357 To move back up, press
23362 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23363 \begin_inset Formula
23365 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23368 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23376 \begin_layout Subsection
23378 \begin_inset Index idx
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 \begin_layout Standard
23391 Roots can be created using the
23394 \begin_inset space ~
23402 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23408 arg "math-insert \\root"
23430 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23436 always produces a square root.
23439 \begin_layout Subsection
23440 Operators with Limits
23441 \begin_inset Index idx
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 \begin_inset Index idx
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23463 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23470 \begin_layout Standard
23472 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23476 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23479 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23480 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23481 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23482 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23483 The sum operator will automatically place its
23484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23491 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23493 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23497 \begin_inset Formula
23499 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23504 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23508 \begin_layout Standard
23509 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23511 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23512 behind the operator and using the menu
23514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23515 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23517 \begin_inset space ~
23521 \begin_inset space ~
23535 \begin_layout Standard
23536 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23545 \begin_inset Index idx
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 \begin_inset Formula
23557 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23562 which will place the
23563 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23575 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23576 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23582 \begin_layout Standard
23583 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23590 Have a look at section
23591 \begin_inset space ~
23595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23597 reference "subsec:Functions"
23601 for an explanation of function macros.
23604 \begin_layout Subsection
23606 \begin_inset Index idx
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23618 \begin_layout Standard
23619 Most math symbols can be found in the
23622 \begin_inset space ~
23627 under one of several categories; including
23644 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23648 \begin_layout Standard
23649 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23650 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23651 don't have to use the
23654 \begin_inset space ~
23659 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23661 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23664 \begin_layout Subsection
23666 \begin_inset Index idx
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 \begin_layout Standard
23679 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23685 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23691 \begin_inset space ~
23699 arg "math-insert \\space"
23703 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23704 For example, the sequence
23709 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23712 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23714 \begin_inset Graphics
23715 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23720 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23721 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23722 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23723 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23724 , because they are negative
23726 Here are two examples:
23729 \begin_layout Standard
23739 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23755 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23761 \begin_layout Subsection
23763 \begin_inset Index idx
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23775 name "subsec:Functions"
23782 \begin_layout Standard
23786 \begin_inset space ~
23791 contains under the button
23794 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23797 a number of function macros, such as
23798 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23802 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23810 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23817 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23818 avoid confusions, because
23819 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23823 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23829 \begin_layout Standard
23830 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23832 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23836 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23842 \begin_layout Standard
23843 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23844 are placed, as described in section
23845 \begin_inset space ~
23849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23851 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23858 \begin_layout Subsection
23860 \begin_inset Index idx
23863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 \begin_layout Standard
23873 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23875 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23876 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23877 commands, for example, to enter
23878 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23881 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23882 Our example is entered by typing
23887 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23894 \begin_inset space ~
23898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23900 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23904 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23907 \begin_layout Standard
23908 \begin_inset Float table
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23919 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23923 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 \begin_inset Tabular
23934 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23935 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24454 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24521 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24524 \begin_inset space ~
24532 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24535 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24539 \begin_layout Section
24540 Brackets and Delimiters
24541 \begin_inset Index idx
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 \begin_inset Index idx
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24563 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24570 \begin_layout Standard
24571 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24573 For some purposes, using just the keys
24578 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24579 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24580 toolbar delimiter icon
24583 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24587 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24588 \begin_inset Formula
24590 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24598 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24599 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24603 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24606 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24612 \begin_inset Formula
24614 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24622 \begin_layout Standard
24623 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24624 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24628 \begin_layout Standard
24629 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24630 left side and right side.
24631 If you use the option
24634 \begin_inset space ~
24639 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24640 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24642 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24647 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24648 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24651 \begin_layout Standard
24652 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24653 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24654 is to go inside the brackets.
24655 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24660 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24661 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24662 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24666 arg "math-delim ( )"
24672 \begin_layout Section
24673 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24674 \begin_inset Index idx
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 \begin_inset Index idx
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 \begin_inset Index idx
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24706 \begin_layout Standard
24707 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24711 \begin_inset space ~
24719 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24723 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24724 Here is an example:
24725 \begin_inset Formula
24727 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24736 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24743 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24748 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24749 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24750 This alignment is set in the box
24755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24804 for every column as default.
24805 For example, the sequence
24806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24817 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24818 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24819 corresponds to the relevant column.
24820 The result will look like this:
24821 \begin_inset Formula
24824 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24825 column & has & has\,right\\
24826 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24835 \begin_layout Standard
24836 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24839 arg "newline-insert newline"
24842 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24843 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24845 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24848 or the math toolbar.
24851 \begin_layout Standard
24852 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24853 It can be created with the menu
24855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24856 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24858 \begin_inset space ~
24870 Here is an example:
24871 \begin_inset Formula
24885 \begin_layout Standard
24886 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24889 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24892 arg "newline-insert newline"
24896 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24901 arg "newline-insert newline"
24904 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24912 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24913 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24914 A new row is created by every further entry of
24917 arg "newline-insert newline"
24921 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24922 Here is an example:
24923 \begin_inset Formula
24925 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24926 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24931 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24932 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24933 \begin_inset Formula
24935 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24943 \begin_layout Standard
24944 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24951 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24952 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24955 reference "eq:asquared"
24960 The other types are described in section
24961 \begin_inset space ~
24965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24967 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24974 \begin_layout Section
24975 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24976 \begin_inset Index idx
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 Math ! Formula numbering
24986 \begin_inset Index idx
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24990 Math ! Referencing formulas
24996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24998 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25005 \begin_layout Standard
25006 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25008 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25009 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25011 \begin_inset space ~
25015 \begin_inset space ~
25023 arg "math-number-toggle"
25027 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25028 within parentheses.
25029 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25030 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25031 the document class.
25032 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25033 separated by a dot:
25034 \begin_inset Formula
25044 arg "math-number-toggle"
25047 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25048 You can only number displayed formulas.
25051 \begin_layout Standard
25052 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25055 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25057 \begin_inset space ~
25061 \begin_inset space ~
25069 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25072 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25073 \begin_inset Formula
25076 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25082 To number all lines use the shortcut
25085 arg "math-number-toggle"
25091 \begin_layout Standard
25092 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25095 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25096 A label is inserted with the menu
25098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25107 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25108 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25109 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25121 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25122 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25123 We inserted in the following example the label
25124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25131 in the second line:
25132 \begin_inset Formula
25134 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25135 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25140 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25141 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25142 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25146 \begin_inset space ~
25154 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25158 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25159 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25160 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25161 as the formula number:
25164 \begin_layout Standard
25165 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25168 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25175 \begin_layout Standard
25176 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25177 's cross-reference box are described in section
25178 \begin_inset space ~
25182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25184 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25189 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25197 \begin_layout Section
25198 User defined math macros
25199 \begin_inset Index idx
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 \begin_layout Standard
25213 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25214 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25215 Math macros are explained in section
25218 \begin_inset space ~
25230 \begin_layout Section
25234 \begin_layout Subsection
25236 \begin_inset Index idx
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 \begin_layout Standard
25249 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25250 To set a font in a formula, use the
25253 \begin_inset space ~
25261 arg "math-insert \\font"
25264 , or enter its command, listed in table
25265 \begin_inset space ~
25269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25271 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25278 \begin_layout Standard
25279 \begin_inset Float table
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25290 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25294 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 \begin_inset Tabular
25305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25306 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25367 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25427 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25481 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25515 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 \begin_layout Standard
25577 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25601 \begin_layout Standard
25602 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25603 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25608 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25609 space when you need a space in the box.
25610 Here is an example where
25611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25622 denotes the set of numbers:
25623 \begin_inset Formula
25625 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25633 \begin_layout Standard
25634 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25635 You can, for example, put a character in
25644 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25648 \begin_inset Newline newline
25651 So it is better not to use this feature.
25654 \begin_layout Standard
25655 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25656 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25660 \begin_inset Newline newline
25663 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25669 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25670 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25676 \begin_layout Standard
25683 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25687 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25689 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25690 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25692 \begin_inset space ~
25700 \begin_layout Subsection
25702 \begin_inset Index idx
25705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_layout Standard
25715 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25717 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25721 \begin_inset space ~
25725 \begin_inset space ~
25733 \begin_inset space ~
25741 arg "math-insert \\font"
25745 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25746 in black instead of blue.
25747 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25748 Here is an example:
25749 \begin_inset Formula
25752 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25753 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25762 \begin_layout Subsection
25764 \begin_inset Index idx
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25776 \begin_layout Standard
25777 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25778 automatically chosen in most situations.
25796 For most characters,
25804 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25805 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25810 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25811 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25812 thinks are appropriate.
25813 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25816 arg "math-insert \\style"
25820 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25821 For example, you can set
25822 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25825 , which is normally in
25834 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25838 The four styles are used in the following example:
25841 \begin_layout Standard
25842 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25846 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25850 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25854 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25860 \begin_layout Standard
25861 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25862 is set in a particular size with the menu
25864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25866 \begin_inset space ~
25871 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25872 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25873 will be adjusted to correspond.
25874 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25885 \begin_layout Standard
25889 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25895 \begin_layout Section
25896 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25898 \begin_inset Index idx
25901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25908 \begin_inset Index idx
25911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25920 \begin_layout Standard
25922 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25923 that are in common use.
25926 \begin_layout Subsection
25927 Enabling AMS-Support
25930 \begin_layout Standard
25931 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25932 the document by selecting the checkbox
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25939 \begin_inset space ~
25943 \begin_inset space ~
25950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25954 \begin_inset Index idx
25957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25958 Document ! Settings
25966 \begin_inset space ~
25972 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25973 -errors in formulas,
25974 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25977 \begin_layout Subsection
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25981 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25986 \begin_inset Index idx
25989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25990 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25998 \begin_layout Standard
25999 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26000 provides a selection of different formula types.
26002 allows you to choose between
26023 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26030 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26033 \begin_layout Chapter
26037 \begin_layout Section
26039 \begin_inset Index idx
26042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26051 name "sec:Cross-References"
26058 \begin_layout Standard
26059 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26060 's strengths is cross-references.
26061 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26063 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26064 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26065 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26068 \begin_layout Enumerate
26072 \begin_layout Enumerate
26073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26075 name "enu:Second-item"
26082 \begin_layout Enumerate
26086 \begin_layout Standard
26087 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26092 or by pressing the toolbar button
26099 A gray label box like this:
26100 \begin_inset Graphics
26101 filename clipart/label.png
26105 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26107 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26142 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26143 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26160 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26165 or the toolbar button
26168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26172 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26173 \begin_inset Graphics
26174 filename clipart/reference.png
26178 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26180 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26193 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26197 \begin_layout Standard
26198 As an alternative to
26200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26203 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26208 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26209 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26211 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26223 \begin_layout Standard
26224 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26231 reference "enu:Second-item"
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 It is recommended to use a protected space
26243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 described in section
26245 \begin_inset space ~
26249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26260 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26261 line breaks between them.
26264 \begin_layout Standard
26265 There are six formats of cross-references:
26268 \begin_layout Description
26269 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26272 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26279 \begin_layout Description
26280 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26281 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26293 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26300 \begin_layout Description
26301 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26302 \begin_inset space ~
26306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26307 LatexCommand pageref
26308 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26315 \begin_layout Description
26317 \begin_inset space ~
26321 \begin_inset space ~
26324 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26326 LatexCommand vpageref
26327 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26332 \begin_inset Newline newline
26335 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26336 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26337 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26338 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26339 it prints “on the next page”.
26340 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26343 \begin_layout Description
26345 \begin_inset space ~
26349 \begin_inset space ~
26353 \begin_inset space ~
26356 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26359 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26364 \begin_inset Newline newline
26367 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26373 ; otherwise it behaves like
26377 \begin_inset space ~
26381 \begin_inset space ~
26390 \begin_layout Description
26392 \begin_inset space ~
26395 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26396 \begin_inset Newline newline
26400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26418 \begin_inset Index idx
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 -packages ! prettyref
26429 \begin_inset Index idx
26432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 -packages ! refstyle
26445 \begin_inset Newline newline
26448 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26449 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26452 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26465 is the default and preferred because
26469 supports only English documents.
26470 The format is specified by using the command
26482 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26483 preamble of the document.
26484 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26497 ) can be done with this command
26498 \begin_inset Newline newline
26505 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26510 \begin_inset Newline newline
26513 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26515 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26517 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26524 \begin_layout Description
26526 \begin_inset space ~
26529 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26531 LatexCommand nameref
26532 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26539 \begin_layout Standard
26540 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26541 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26543 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26547 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26551 \begin_layout Standard
26552 You can only use the style
26556 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26560 is always possible.
26563 \begin_layout Standard
26564 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26565 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26567 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26568 \begin_inset space ~
26572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26574 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26582 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26586 \begin_inset space ~
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26595 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26596 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26599 \begin_inset space ~
26604 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26605 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26608 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 You can change labels at any time.
26616 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26617 do not need to think about this.
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26623 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 References are described in detail in the section
26629 \begin_inset space ~
26639 \begin_inset space ~
26647 \begin_layout Section
26648 Table of Contents and other Listings
26649 \begin_inset Index idx
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26659 \begin_inset Index idx
26662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 Navigating ! Outline
26669 \begin_inset Index idx
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26688 \begin_layout Subsection
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26692 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26703 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26705 \begin_inset space ~
26709 \begin_inset space ~
26715 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26717 If you click on it, the
26721 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26722 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26723 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26725 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26727 \begin_inset space ~
26732 that is described in section
26733 \begin_inset space ~
26737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26739 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26746 \begin_layout Standard
26747 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26748 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26750 \begin_inset space ~
26754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26756 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26760 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26762 \begin_inset space ~
26766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26768 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26772 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26774 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26777 \begin_layout Subsection
26778 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26781 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26788 \begin_layout Standard
26789 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26791 You can insert them via the
26793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26797 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26800 \begin_layout Section
26801 URLs and Hyperlinks
26802 \begin_inset Index idx
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 \begin_inset Index idx
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 \begin_layout Subsection
26826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26847 \begin_inset Flex URL
26850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 \begin_layout Standard
26861 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26867 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26889 \begin_layout Subsection
26891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26893 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26901 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26906 or with the toolbar button
26913 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26922 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26923 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26926 name "LyX's homepage"
26927 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26931 , an Email address like this:
26932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26934 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26935 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26940 , or a link to a file.
26943 \begin_layout Standard
26944 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26957 to the link target.
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26962 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26963 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26964 the text style dialog.
26965 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26971 name "LyX's homepage"
26972 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26979 \begin_layout Standard
26980 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26984 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26991 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26993 \begin_inset Newline newline
27001 \begin_inset Newline newline
27008 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27011 \begin_layout Section
27013 \begin_inset Index idx
27016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27025 name "sec:Appendices"
27032 \begin_layout Standard
27033 Appendices are created with the menu
27035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27037 \begin_inset space ~
27041 \begin_inset space ~
27047 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27048 as the appendix part of the book.
27049 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27053 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27054 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27055 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27056 and the subsection number.
27057 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27063 \begin_inset space ~
27067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27069 reference "chap:Credits"
27074 \begin_inset space ~
27078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27080 reference "subsec:Export"
27087 \begin_layout Section
27089 \begin_inset Index idx
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27101 name "sec:Bibliography"
27108 \begin_layout Standard
27109 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27111 You can include a bibliography database,
27115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 Known under the name
27117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27120 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27130 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27131 manually, using the paragraph environment
27135 , which was described in section
27136 \begin_inset space ~
27140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27142 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27147 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27148 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27152 use a bibliography database.
27155 \begin_layout Subsection
27156 The Bibliography Environment
27159 \begin_layout Standard
27164 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27166 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27175 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27177 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27187 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27196 or the toolbar button
27199 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27203 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27204 containing the available citations.
27205 Select one or more keys from the list and
27215 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27216 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27220 \begin_layout Standard
27221 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27222 entry with surrounding brackets.
27227 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27228 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27240 \begin_layout Standard
27244 Companion Second Edition
27247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27249 key "latexcompanion"
27256 \begin_layout Standard
27257 The \SpecialChar LyX
27258 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27274 \begin_inset space ~
27282 arg "layout-paragraph"
27286 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27289 \begin_layout Subsection
27290 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27292 \begin_inset Index idx
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27296 Bibliography ! Databases
27302 \begin_inset Index idx
27305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27315 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27322 \begin_layout Standard
27323 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27329 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27331 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27332 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27337 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27339 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27340 your working field in a database.
27341 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27342 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27343 list for that document.
27344 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27348 \begin_layout Standard
27349 The database is a text file with the file extension
27350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27361 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27362 The format is explained in
27363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27369 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27373 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27378 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27379 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27380 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27382 \begin_inset Flex URL
27385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27387 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27395 \begin_layout Standard
27396 To use a database, use the menu
27398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27403 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27405 \begin_inset space ~
27411 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27412 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27419 Add bibliography to TOC
27421 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27426 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27427 in the document or just the cited references.
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27431 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27443 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27444 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27445 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27446 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27448 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27455 \begin_inset Newline newline
27459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27461 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27478 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27479 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27481 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27496 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27500 The following variants are possible:
27503 \begin_layout Description
27504 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27505 with other bibliography packages (e.
27506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27510 \begin_inset space \space{}
27517 ), only with the package
27521 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27525 \begin_layout Description
27526 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27527 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27528 with all bibliography packages, except
27533 \begin_layout Description
27534 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27539 , works with all bibliography packages
27542 \begin_layout Standard
27543 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27544 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27546 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27549 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 When you select the option
27565 Sectioned bibliography
27569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27573 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27574 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27576 Customizing Bibliographies
27580 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27585 Additional Features
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27591 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27592 the two methods of creating them.
27593 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27594 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27595 We used the style file
27599 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27602 \begin_layout Subsection
27604 \begin_inset Index idx
27607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 Bibliography ! Citation format
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27617 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27618 For this feature you need to enable the option
27624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27628 \begin_inset Index idx
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 Document ! Settings
27642 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27643 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27644 style files as explained in
27645 the previous section.
27648 \begin_layout Standard
27649 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27650 the citation reference window.
27651 Here is an example where the text
27652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27656 \begin_inset space ~
27660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27663 appears after the reference:
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27671 key "latexcompanion"
27678 \begin_layout Section
27680 \begin_inset Index idx
27683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27699 \begin_layout Standard
27700 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27704 \begin_inset space ~
27709 or the toolbar button
27716 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27717 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27718 by \SpecialChar LyX
27719 as the index entry.
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27726 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27728 \begin_inset space ~
27734 A light blue box labeled
27735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27746 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27747 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27751 \begin_layout Standard
27752 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27753 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27754 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27755 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27759 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27766 \begin_layout Subsection
27767 Grouping Index Entries
27768 \begin_inset Index idx
27771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27781 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27783 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27784 lists under the entry
27785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27793 First we create the entry
27794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27802 \begin_inset space ~
27806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27808 reference "subsec:Lists"
27813 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27814 \begin_inset space ~
27818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27820 reference "sec:Itemize"
27824 , we insert the command
27827 \begin_layout Standard
27833 \begin_layout Standard
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27843 \begin_layout Standard
27844 for the enumerated list in section
27845 \begin_inset space ~
27849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27851 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 The exclamation mark
27860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27867 marks the grouping levels.
27868 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27869 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27870 If we don't have an index entry for
27871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27878 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27881 \begin_layout Subsection
27883 \begin_inset Index idx
27886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 Index ! Page ranges
27895 \begin_layout Standard
27896 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27898 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27899 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27900 an index entry in section
27901 \begin_inset space ~
27905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27907 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27914 \begin_layout Standard
27917 Paragraph environments|(
27920 \begin_layout Standard
27921 and another entry at the end of section
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27928 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27935 \begin_layout Standard
27938 Paragraph environments|)
27941 \begin_layout Standard
27943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 respectively start and end the index range.
27967 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27968 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27969 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27970 An example is the index entry
27971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27974 Document ! Settings
27975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27981 \begin_layout Subsection
27983 \begin_inset Index idx
27986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 Index ! Cross referencing
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27997 We referred for example in the index entry
27998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28006 \begin_inset space ~
28010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28012 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28016 ) to the index entry
28017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28024 in the same section using the entry
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28030 GIF|see{Image formats}
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28036 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28037 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28040 \begin_layout Subsection
28042 \begin_inset Index idx
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 Index ! Entry order
28054 \begin_layout Standard
28055 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28056 follow the rules for the index order.
28057 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28065 \begin_inset space ~
28069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28071 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28080 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28081 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28106 \begin_inset Index idx
28109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28110 Dummy entries ! maïs
28116 \begin_inset Index idx
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 Dummy entries ! maître
28126 \begin_inset Index idx
28129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28130 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28135 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28136 maïs, maison, maître.
28137 To achieve this, we use the command
28140 \begin_layout Standard
28143 previous entry@current entry
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28147 In our case we want to have
28148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28163 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28166 \begin_layout Standard
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28173 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28174 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28176 See the next subsection for an example.
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28192 to generate the index (see section
28193 \begin_inset space ~
28197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28199 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28208 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28209 -package aeguill in section
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28216 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28220 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28221 -packages although all these index
28222 commands start with
28223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28236 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28241 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28268 \begin_layout Subsection
28270 \begin_inset Index idx
28273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28274 Index ! Entry layout
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28283 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28284 \begin_inset Index idx
28287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28290 This is an italic dummy entry
28295 You can also format the page number using the character
28296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28303 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28304 -command without a backslash.
28305 We can write for example
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28311 italic page number:|textit
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 to get the page number in italic.
28316 \begin_inset Index idx
28319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28320 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28325 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28326 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28344 \begin_inset space ~
28350 Have a look at section
28351 \begin_inset space ~
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28357 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28361 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28365 \begin_layout Standard
28366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28378 to generate the index, see section
28379 \begin_inset space ~
28383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28385 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28394 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28399 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28400 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28403 key "latexcompanion"
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28416 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28418 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28419 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28420 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28421 If so, put the following in the preamble
28424 \begin_layout Standard
28436 \begin_layout Standard
28440 \begin_layout Standard
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28447 in the index entry.
28448 \begin_inset Index idx
28451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28452 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28457 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28458 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28459 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28462 \begin_layout Standard
28463 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28464 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28465 a bold font for all index entries.
28466 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28478 documentation for details,
28479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28481 key "makeindex,xindy"
28488 \begin_layout Subsection
28490 \begin_inset Index idx
28493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28502 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28509 \begin_layout Standard
28510 If the index generation program
28514 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28515 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28519 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28520 distribution, is used.
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28529 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28530 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28531 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28532 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28533 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28543 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28545 dialog, see section
28546 \begin_inset space ~
28550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28552 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28557 The available options are listed and explained in
28558 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28560 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28565 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28569 \begin_layout Standard
28570 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28571 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28575 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28579 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28580 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28583 \begin_layout Subsection
28587 \begin_layout Standard
28588 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28589 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28597 next to the standard index.
28599 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28600 that add this feature.
28607 \begin_inset Index idx
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28612 -packages ! splitidx
28617 package to generate multiple indexes.
28618 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28624 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28626 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28633 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28634 style, but it also includes
28635 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28636 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28644 \begin_layout Standard
28645 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28646 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28649 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28652 and select the option
28654 Use multiple Indexes
28661 already contains the standard index
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28670 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28671 also appear as a heading) to the
28675 input field and press the
28680 The new index now also appears in the list.
28681 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28682 label color to the new index.
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28696 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28697 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28698 are additional features:
28701 \begin_layout Itemize
28702 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28703 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28706 \begin_layout Itemize
28707 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28708 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28716 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28717 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28718 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28719 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28722 \begin_layout Section
28723 Nomenclature/Glossary
28724 \begin_inset Index idx
28727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 \begin_inset Index idx
28737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28768 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28777 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28778 called nomenclature or glossary.
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28789 \begin_inset Index idx
28792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28794 -packages ! nomencl
28800 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28808 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28812 \begin_layout Standard
28813 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28814 and then use the menu
28816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28827 or the toolbar button
28830 arg "nomencl-insert"
28835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28846 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28849 \begin_layout Standard
28850 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28851 The first is the term or
28855 that you wish to define.
28860 of the term or symbol.
28863 \begin_layout Standard
28864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28873 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28881 \begin_layout Subsection
28882 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28883 \begin_inset Index idx
28886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28887 Nomenclature ! Layout
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28896 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28900 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28907 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28915 \begin_inset Newline newline
28923 \begin_inset Newline newline
28929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28936 character starts/ends the formula.
28937 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28938 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28950 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28961 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28962 -syntax is given in section
28963 \begin_inset space ~
28967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28969 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28980 \begin_inset space ~
28985 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28987 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28992 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28999 in this document is:
29000 \begin_inset Newline newline
29005 dummy entry for the character
29010 \begin_inset Newline newline
29022 \begin_inset space ~
29032 font use the command
29061 \begin_layout Standard
29062 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29067 \begin_inset space \space{}
29071 \begin_inset Newline newline
29087 \begin_inset Newline newline
29090 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29091 This command will make the font of all symbols
29098 \begin_inset space ~
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29107 If the characters |
29108 \begin_inset space \space{}
29112 \begin_inset space \space{}
29116 \begin_inset space \space{}
29120 \begin_inset space \space{}
29124 \begin_inset space \space{}
29127 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29128 a quote character in front of them.
29129 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29130 LatexCommand nomenclature
29131 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29132 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29139 \begin_layout Subsection
29140 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29141 \begin_inset Index idx
29144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29145 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29154 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29155 -code of the symbol
29157 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29159 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29162 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29163 LatexCommand nomenclature
29165 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29172 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29176 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29177 LatexCommand nomenclature
29180 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29185 They will be sorted by
29186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29212 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29215 will be sorted before the
29219 since the character
29220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29227 is considered in sorting.
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29234 \begin_inset space ~
29239 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29240 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29242 For the example given, you can insert
29246 in this field for the
29247 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29254 will be located before
29255 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29261 \begin_layout Standard
29262 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29276 \begin_layout Subsection
29277 Nomenclature Options
29278 \begin_inset Index idx
29281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29282 Nomenclature ! Options
29290 \begin_layout Standard
29295 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29296 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29299 \begin_layout Description
29300 refeq Appends the phrase
29301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29316 to every nomenclature entry, where
29322 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29325 \begin_layout Description
29326 refpage Appends the phrase
29327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29342 to every nomenclature entry, where
29348 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29351 \begin_layout Description
29352 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29356 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29357 class options list in the
29359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29363 In this document the options
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29378 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29379 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29384 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29387 \begin_layout Description
29397 \begin_layout Description
29400 nomrefpage Like the
29407 \begin_layout Description
29410 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29419 \begin_layout Description
29423 \begin_inset space ~
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29434 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29446 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29447 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29451 \begin_layout Standard
29459 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29462 \begin_inset Newline newline
29469 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29474 \begin_inset Newline newline
29478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29493 by their translation.
29496 \begin_layout Subsection
29497 Printing the Nomenclature
29498 \begin_inset Index idx
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 Nomenclature ! Printing
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29511 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29514 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29530 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29531 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29532 You can choose between these settings:
29535 \begin_layout Description
29536 Default a space of 1
29537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29543 \begin_layout Description
29545 \begin_inset space ~
29549 \begin_inset space ~
29552 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29555 \begin_layout Description
29556 Custom custom space
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29569 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29577 For example, in order to change the name to
29581 , add the following line to the preamble:
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29592 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29595 \begin_layout Subsection
29596 Nomenclature Program
29597 \begin_inset Index idx
29600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29601 Nomenclature ! Program
29607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29609 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29622 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29623 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29625 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29630 by adding options, see section
29631 \begin_inset space ~
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29637 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29642 The available options are listed and explained in
29643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29645 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29652 \begin_layout Section
29654 \begin_inset Index idx
29657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29664 \begin_inset Index idx
29667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29668 Document ! Branches
29674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29676 name "sec:Branches"
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29685 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29686 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29687 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29692 allows you to put text into branches.
29693 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29694 To create a branch, either select the menu
29696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29697 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29700 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29709 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29710 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29711 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29712 and whether the name of the branch should
29713 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29714 (see below for an example).
29715 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29716 to the name of the other) and to add
29717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29729 \begin_inset space ~
29732 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29733 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29738 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29743 where you can choose a branch.
29744 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29749 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29750 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29754 \begin_inset Branch Question
29757 \begin_layout Standard
29758 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29767 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29771 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29790 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29791 Consider for example a file
29792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29799 which has the above branches.
29801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29832 branch were inactive,
29833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29848 branch was active, likewise
29849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29864 branch was active, and
29865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29868 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29872 if both branches were active.
29873 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29877 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29883 \begin_layout Standard
29884 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29885 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29886 definitions for each branch.
29887 For example you can define for the question branch
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29892 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29893 -syntax, see section
29894 \begin_inset space ~
29898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29900 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29922 \begin_layout Standard
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 and for the answer branch
29936 \begin_layout Standard
29946 \begin_layout Standard
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 \begin_inset Branch Question
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29992 \begin_layout Standard
29993 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29996 \begin_layout Standard
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30028 \begin_layout Standard
30029 Now it is possible to use the
30033 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30040 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30043 commands to obtain conditional output.
30044 Here is an example formula where only the
30051 \begin_inset Formula
30053 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30071 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30077 \begin_inset space \space{}
30080 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30082 For this advanced usage, see the
30088 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30093 \begin_layout Section
30095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30097 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30102 \begin_inset Index idx
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30121 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30123 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30129 \begin_inset Index idx
30132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30134 -packages ! hyperref
30139 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30140 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30141 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30142 part of the document.
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30147 The header information in the dialog tab
30151 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30152 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30153 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30154 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30158 \begin_inset space ~
30162 \begin_inset space ~
30167 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30168 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30169 and author entries.
30173 \begin_inset space ~
30177 \begin_inset space ~
30181 \begin_inset space ~
30186 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30190 You can specify in the dialog tab
30194 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30199 \begin_inset space ~
30203 \begin_inset space ~
30207 \begin_inset space ~
30212 option allows long links to be split;
30215 \begin_inset space ~
30219 \begin_inset space ~
30223 \begin_inset space ~
30231 \begin_inset space ~
30236 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30239 \begin_inset space ~
30244 colors the different links.
30245 The default colors are:
30248 \begin_layout Labeling
30249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30254 for hyperlinks and URLs
30257 \begin_layout Labeling
30258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30266 \begin_layout Labeling
30267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30276 but you can change these in the field
30281 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30287 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30290 \begin_layout Standard
30295 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30296 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30297 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30300 \begin_layout Standard
30305 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30306 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30307 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30317 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30318 when opening the PDF.
30320 \begin_inset space ~
30323 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30324 \begin_inset space ~
30327 1 will only display the sections.
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30331 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30332 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30338 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30348 \begin_layout Section
30350 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30354 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30361 \begin_layout Subsection
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30377 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30384 \begin_layout Standard
30385 As \SpecialChar LyX
30386 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30387 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30388 commands and constructs,
30391 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30392 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30393 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30394 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30396 cannot support all packages and
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30401 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30403 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30407 Code box is created by the menu
30409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30411 \begin_inset space ~
30416 or by the toolbar button
30429 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30437 \begin_layout Standard
30438 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30440 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30442 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30443 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30450 , you can write the command part
30456 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30457 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30461 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30462 Code box behind the word.
30463 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30464 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30468 \begin_layout Standard
30469 \begin_inset Graphics
30470 filename clipart/ERT.png
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30482 \begin_layout Standard
30483 This is a line with a
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30511 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30519 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30520 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30521 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30522 know that the command is finished.
30530 \begin_layout Subsection
30531 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30533 \begin_inset Argument 1
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30537 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30544 \begin_inset Index idx
30547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30557 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30566 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30567 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30568 uses in the background.
30569 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30570 is based on commands, you can
30571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30579 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30580 any time if you know the right commands.
30581 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30582 is the end of the day.
30583 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30584 all caption labels bold.
30585 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30587 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30591 \begin_layout Standard
30592 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30594 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30596 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 As result you find that the package
30614 \begin_inset Index idx
30617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30619 -packages ! caption
30625 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30630 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30634 \begin_inset space ~
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30647 usepackage[options]{package name}
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30652 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30653 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30654 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 In your case the package name is
30663 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30668 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30669 So you add the command
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30677 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30680 \begin_layout Standard
30681 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30686 For more commands provided by the
30690 package, have a look at its documentation,
30691 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30705 \begin_layout Standard
30706 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30708 For example if you use a
30712 class, you don't need the package
30716 , you can instead write
30719 \begin_layout Standard
30724 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30730 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30731 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30732 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30739 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30744 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30746 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30747 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30748 Code box as described in the previous
30752 \begin_layout Standard
30753 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30754 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30759 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30767 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30773 \begin_layout Standard
30777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30787 \begin_inset Note Note
30790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30799 \begin_layout Left Header
30800 \begin_inset Argument 1
30803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30823 \begin_inset Note Note
30826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 defines the header line as described below
30835 \begin_layout Center Header
30836 \begin_inset Argument 1
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30848 \begin_layout Right Header
30849 \begin_inset Argument 1
30852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30873 \begin_layout Left Footer
30874 \begin_inset Argument 1
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 \begin_layout Center Footer
30899 \begin_inset Argument 1
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30914 \begin_inset Newline newline
30918 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30924 \begin_layout Right Footer
30925 \begin_inset Argument 1
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30950 \begin_layout Section
30951 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30954 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30959 \begin_inset Index idx
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 Document ! Header/Footer line
30969 \begin_inset Index idx
30972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 \begin_layout Standard
30982 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30986 \begin_inset space ~
30997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31003 \begin_inset space ~
31009 As a second step add in the menu
31011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31012 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31021 Custom Header/Footerlines
31024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 This module offers the following 6
31029 \begin_inset space ~
31035 \begin_layout Description
31037 \begin_inset space ~
31041 \begin_inset space ~
31045 \begin_inset space ~
31049 \begin_inset space ~
31053 \begin_inset space ~
31059 \begin_layout Description
31061 \begin_inset space ~
31065 \begin_inset space ~
31069 \begin_inset space ~
31073 \begin_inset space ~
31077 \begin_inset space ~
31083 \begin_layout Standard
31084 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31085 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31088 \begin_layout Standard
31089 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31090 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31092 \begin_inset space ~
31096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31098 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31102 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31106 \begin_inset Float figure
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 \begin_inset Tabular
31116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31118 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31120 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31140 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31180 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 The normal text on the page goes here.
31185 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31187 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31188 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31193 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31202 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31260 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31283 name "fig:Page-layout"
31287 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31309 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31318 is set to “Default”.
31319 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31328 \begin_layout Subsection
31332 \begin_layout Standard
31333 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31334 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31335 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31336 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31338 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31340 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31345 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31351 \begin_inset space ~
31359 \begin_layout Description
31362 thepage prints the current page number
31365 \begin_layout Description
31368 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31371 \begin_layout Description
31374 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31377 \begin_layout Description
31380 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31381 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31388 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31391 because it usually goes in a left header.
31394 \begin_layout Description
31397 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31398 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31400 It is normally used in the right header.
31403 \begin_layout Subsection
31404 Default header/footer
31407 \begin_layout Standard
31408 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31409 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31410 footer has the page number.
31411 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31412 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31413 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31416 \begin_inset space ~
31424 \begin_layout Subsection
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31429 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31430 Some pages are different.
31431 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31432 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31433 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31434 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31435 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31439 Header and footer decoration line
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31443 By default, you get a 0.4
31444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31447 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31448 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31460 in the following way:
31463 \begin_layout Standard
31470 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31473 \begin_layout Standard
31474 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31487 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31497 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31498 \begin_inset space ~
31502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31511 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31512 Several header/footer lines
31515 \begin_layout Standard
31516 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31517 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31518 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31520 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31546 \begin_layout Standard
31553 headheight}{height}
31556 \begin_layout Standard
31561 is a size in standard units (e.
31562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31566 \begin_inset space \space{}
31574 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31575 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31576 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31577 logfile with the menu
31579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31581 \begin_inset space ~
31589 \begin_inset space ~
31594 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31599 \begin_inset Index idx
31602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 -packages ! fancyhdr
31610 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31611 for your header/footer.
31614 \begin_layout Subsection
31618 \begin_layout Standard
31619 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31620 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31621 This example consists of the following definition:
31624 \begin_layout Description
31626 \begin_inset space ~
31635 , empty optional argument
31638 \begin_layout Description
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31643 Header empty, empty optional argument
31646 \begin_layout Description
31648 \begin_inset space ~
31657 in the optional argument
31660 \begin_layout Description
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31671 in the optional argument
31674 \begin_layout Description
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31693 \begin_inset Newline newline
31697 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31704 in the optional argument
31707 \begin_layout Description
31709 \begin_inset space ~
31718 , empty optional argument
31721 \begin_layout Description
31724 headrulewidth set to 2
31725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31733 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 pagestyle{headings}
31769 \begin_inset Note Note
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 switches back to page style with the default headings
31781 \begin_layout Section
31782 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31785 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31790 \begin_inset Index idx
31793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31800 \begin_inset Index idx
31803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31814 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31815 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31816 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31819 \begin_layout Subsection
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31824 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31830 \begin_inset Index idx
31833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 -packages ! preview-latex
31840 (on some systems named simply
31845 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31853 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31855 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31863 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31864 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31865 -package are automatically
31866 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31870 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31876 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31878 activate the option
31881 \begin_inset space ~
31888 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31894 \begin_inset space ~
31898 \begin_inset space ~
31901 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31921 \begin_inset space ~
31926 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31930 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31935 \begin_inset space ~
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31952 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31953 and when you finish
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31966 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31967 generated by activating the option
31970 \begin_inset space ~
31976 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31984 \begin_layout Subsection
31985 Selected document parts
31988 \begin_layout Standard
31989 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31990 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31991 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31992 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31994 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32000 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32001 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32002 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32005 \begin_layout Standard
32006 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32013 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32025 is explained in section
32027 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32032 \begin_inset space ~
32042 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32043 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32044 the final rotated boxes,
32045 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32046 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32048 Here is the result:
32051 \begin_layout Standard
32052 \begin_inset Preview
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32063 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32069 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32079 height_special "totalheight"
32084 backgroundcolor "none"
32087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32112 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32118 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 Previewing works also for colors.
32142 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32161 is explained in section
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32182 \begin_inset Preview
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32207 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32212 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32232 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 If \SpecialChar LyX
32240 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32241 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32242 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32243 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32244 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32245 the \SpecialChar TeX
32247 If \SpecialChar LyX
32248 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32249 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32251 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32252 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32253 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32256 \begin_layout Subsection
32261 \begin_layout Standard
32262 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32263 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32266 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32268 \begin_inset space ~
32273 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32275 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32277 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32278 's main window, then only this selection
32279 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32280 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32281 the source view window.
32286 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32287 ; but note that if you have
32288 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32290 not just the one which is open at the time.
32293 \begin_layout Section
32294 Advanced Find and Replace
32295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32297 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32302 \begin_inset Index idx
32305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32312 \begin_inset Index idx
32315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32324 \begin_layout Subsection
32328 \begin_layout Standard
32329 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32330 allows for searching of complex,
32331 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32333 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32334 The key-features are:
32337 \begin_layout Itemize
32338 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32339 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32340 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32344 \begin_layout Itemize
32345 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32346 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32347 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32348 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32351 \begin_layout Itemize
32352 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32353 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32354 outside of mathematics environments
32357 \begin_layout Itemize
32358 Search may be widened to a specific
32363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32370 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32371 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32378 \begin_layout Itemize
32379 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32380 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32385 \begin_inset space ~
32388 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32391 \begin_layout Subsection
32395 \begin_layout Standard
32396 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32398 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32411 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32414 ) or the toolbar button
32417 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32423 Advanced Find and Replace
32428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32438 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32442 \begin_inset space ~
32447 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32450 arg "paragraph-break"
32454 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32455 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32459 arg "paragraph-break"
32462 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32466 searches backwards.
32469 \begin_layout Standard
32473 \begin_inset space ~
32478 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32487 \begin_inset space ~
32492 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32496 Searching for mathematics
32499 \begin_layout Standard
32500 Mathematical formulas, such as
32501 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32504 or something more complex like
32505 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32508 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32513 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32514 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32515 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32516 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32527 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32528 This is done by switching to the
32532 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32537 This way, entering in the
32544 \begin_layout Itemize
32545 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32546 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32549 \begin_layout Itemize
32550 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32551 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32554 \begin_layout Itemize
32555 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32556 of it only within section headings.
32557 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32558 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32562 \begin_layout Itemize
32563 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32564 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32571 \begin_layout Standard
32572 The entries made in the
32576 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32579 \begin_inset space ~
32585 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32589 button or alternatively press
32592 arg "paragraph-break"
32599 while the cursor is in the
32602 \begin_inset space ~
32610 \begin_layout Standard
32611 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32613 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32617 \begin_layout Itemize
32618 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32619 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32627 with its typewriter version
32628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32642 \begin_layout Itemize
32643 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32649 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32661 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32668 (you may want to enable the
32671 \begin_inset space ~
32679 \begin_inset space ~
32684 options and disable the
32692 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32700 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32701 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32705 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32708 , or occurrences of
32709 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32713 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32719 \begin_layout Subsection
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32729 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32733 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32742 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32748 This is done with the context menu
32750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32751 Insert Regular Expression
32753 while the cursor is in the
32758 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32759 expression matching rules
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32764 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32771 \begin_inset space ~
32774 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32775 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32781 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32782 same text in the document.
32783 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32784 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32787 \begin_layout Enumerate
32788 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32793 editor the fraction
32794 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32798 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32801 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32802 fractions with the given denominator.
32805 \begin_layout Enumerate
32806 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32818 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32823 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32824 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32825 Also, by inserting a
32826 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32829 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32830 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32833 \begin_layout Standard
32834 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32835 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32836 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32839 , and referring back to them through
32840 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32844 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32848 For example, try searching with the regexp
32849 \begin_inset Newline newline
32852 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32855 \begin_inset Newline newline
32858 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32861 \begin_layout Standard
32862 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32865 \begin_layout Standard
32866 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32874 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32875 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32876 sub-expressions is absolute.
32878 \begin_inset space ~
32882 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32885 always refers to the first occurrence of
32886 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32889 in all entered regexps.
32897 \begin_layout Section
32899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32901 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32906 \begin_inset Index idx
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32920 has a built-in spell checker.
32923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32930 key or the toolbar button
32933 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32936 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32937 beginning of the currently selected text.
32938 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32939 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32940 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32941 scrolled so that it is visible.
32942 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32943 n, if any could be found.
32944 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32948 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32949 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32952 \begin_layout Standard
32953 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32960 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32961 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32963 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32964 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32967 \begin_inset space ~
32975 arg "dialog-show character"
32978 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32980 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32983 \begin_layout Standard
32984 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32985 can be downloaded from here:
32986 \begin_inset Newline newline
32990 \begin_inset Flex URL
32993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32995 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33001 \begin_inset Newline newline
33005 \begin_inset space ~
33008 files for each language.
33009 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33013 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33014 's installation subfolder
33022 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33024 \begin_inset Newline newline
33027 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33028 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33029 but in most cases these are
33045 is the language code.
33048 \begin_layout Subsection
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33056 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33058 \begin_inset space ~
33061 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33064 you can set the following things:
33067 \begin_layout Description
33069 \begin_inset space ~
33072 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33073 should use for spell checking.
33074 Depending on your platform,
33088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33090 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33105 \begin_inset space ~
33108 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33111 \begin_layout Description
33113 \begin_inset space ~
33116 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33117 will always use the given language
33118 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33121 \begin_layout Description
33123 \begin_inset space ~
33126 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33132 \begin_inset space \space{}
33136 This should normally not be needed.
33139 \begin_layout Description
33141 \begin_inset space ~
33145 \begin_inset space ~
33148 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33160 \begin_layout Description
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33165 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33166 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33167 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33168 appear in a context menu.
33169 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33173 \begin_layout Description
33175 \begin_inset space ~
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33186 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33190 \begin_layout Section
33192 \begin_inset Index idx
33195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33204 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33213 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33214 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33226 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33235 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33237 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33238 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33239 which are available for many languages.
33242 \begin_layout Standard
33243 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33244 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33248 \begin_layout Subsection
33249 Setting up the thesaurus
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33261 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33265 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33270 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33276 \begin_inset space ~
33284 For instance, the US English files are named:
33287 \begin_layout Itemize
33291 \begin_layout Itemize
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33304 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33305 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33308 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33309 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33310 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33312 \begin_inset space ~
33317 ) to the path where they are installed.
33321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33323 ies, typical locations are
33329 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33333 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33337 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33340 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33346 LibreOffice-<Version>
33353 On the Mac, the default location is
33355 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33356 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33357 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33358 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33359 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33360 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33368 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33369 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33370 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33374 \begin_layout Standard
33375 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33376 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33380 \begin_layout Itemize
33381 \begin_inset Flex URL
33384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33386 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33394 \begin_layout Standard
33395 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33396 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33398 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33399 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33400 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33407 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33409 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33410 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33417 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33420 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33426 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33429 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33430 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33440 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33442 \begin_inset space ~
33447 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33450 \begin_layout Subsection
33451 Using the thesaurus
33454 \begin_layout Standard
33455 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33457 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33460 or the toolbar button
33463 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33466 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33468 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33470 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33471 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33472 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33481 ), related terms (such as
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33493 ), compounds (such as
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33505 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33514 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33518 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33519 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33525 the dictionary, such as the above
33529 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33534 \begin_inset space \space{}
33537 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33538 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33539 For example, looking up the word form
33543 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33548 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33553 \begin_inset space \space{}
33564 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33565 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33566 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33569 \begin_layout Section
33571 \begin_inset Index idx
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33581 \begin_inset Index idx
33584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 Document ! Change Tracking
33591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33593 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33600 \begin_layout Standard
33601 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33602 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33603 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33604 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33608 \begin_inset space ~
33611 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33621 \begin_layout Standard
33622 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33636 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33637 You can change the color in
33639 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33640 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33642 \begin_inset space ~
33646 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33657 \begin_inset Index idx
33660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33661 Color ! Change tracking
33666 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33667 's status bar when the
33668 cursor is in changed text.
33669 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33672 arg "changes-merge"
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33681 \begin_inset Index idx
33684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33693 \begin_layout Standard
33694 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33701 \begin_inset Graphics
33702 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33711 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33718 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33722 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 \begin_inset Tabular
33730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33731 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33733 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 arg "changes-track"
33751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33759 \begin_inset space ~
33762 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33782 arg "changes-output"
33790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33798 \begin_inset space ~
33801 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33841 Jumps to the next change
33847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 arg "change-accept"
33864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33895 arg "change-reject"
33903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33911 \begin_inset space ~
33914 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33934 arg "changes-merge"
33942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33950 \begin_inset space ~
33953 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33955 \begin_inset space ~
33964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33973 arg "all-changes-accept"
33981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33992 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34016 arg "all-changes-reject"
34024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34035 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34074 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34154 \begin_layout Standard
34155 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34156 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34157 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34158 the next change after the current cursor position.
34159 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34160 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34161 step to the next change.
34162 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34165 \begin_layout Standard
34166 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34167 to describe a change.
34170 \begin_layout Standard
34171 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34177 \begin_inset Index idx
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 -packages ! dvipost
34188 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34190 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34196 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34200 \begin_layout Section
34201 Comparison of Documents
34202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34204 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34209 \begin_inset Index idx
34212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 Comparison of documents
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34225 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34229 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34230 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34232 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34234 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34255 \begin_inset space ~
34259 \begin_inset space ~
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34280 enables the change tracking option
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34287 \begin_inset space ~
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34296 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34299 \begin_layout Section
34300 International Support
34301 \begin_inset Index idx
34304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 International support
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34314 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34315 with any language you want.
34316 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34317 up \SpecialChar LyX
34319 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34321 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34330 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34331 \begin_inset space ~
34335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34337 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34344 \begin_layout Subsection
34346 \begin_inset Index idx
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 \begin_inset Index idx
34359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34360 Document ! Settings
34366 \begin_inset Index idx
34369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 Document ! Language
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34382 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34385 dialog lets you set
34387 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34397 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34402 \begin_inset space ~
34407 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34408 For details about the different encoding options see section
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34415 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34422 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 Keyboard mapping configuration
34424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34426 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34434 If you have for example a U.
34435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34438 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34439 can use an alternate keymap.
34440 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34445 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34446 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34447 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34450 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34457 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34462 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34463 which one you want to use.
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34467 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34468 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34469 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34473 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34474 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34475 one to support the characters you want.
34476 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34483 \begin_layout Chapter
34486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34488 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34495 \begin_layout Standard
34496 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34497 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34498 topic inside the user's guide.
34501 \begin_layout Section
34503 \begin_inset Index idx
34506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34520 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34523 \begin_layout Subsection
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 Creates a new document.
34531 \begin_layout Subsection
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34537 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34538 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34541 \begin_layout Subsection
34545 \begin_layout Standard
34549 \begin_layout Subsection
34553 \begin_layout Standard
34554 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34555 Click there on a file to open it.
34558 \begin_layout Subsection
34562 \begin_layout Standard
34563 Closes the current document.
34566 \begin_layout Subsection
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 Closes all opened documents.
34574 \begin_layout Subsection
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 Saves the actual document.
34582 \begin_layout Subsection
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34590 \begin_layout Subsection
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 Saves all opened documents.
34598 \begin_layout Subsection
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34603 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34606 \begin_layout Subsection
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34611 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34612 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34613 It is described in the section
34615 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34620 Additional Features
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34631 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34633 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34634 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34638 \begin_layout Standard
34639 When using the menu entry
34642 \begin_inset space ~
34647 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34655 \begin_inset space ~
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34664 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34665 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34668 \begin_layout Subsection
34670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34672 name "subsec:Export"
34679 \begin_layout Standard
34680 You can export your document to various file formats.
34681 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34683 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34684 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34685 during its configuration.
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34697 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34704 \begin_layout Description
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34713 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34718 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34719 \begin_inset Newline newline
34722 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34723 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34727 \begin_layout Description
34728 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34734 \begin_layout Description
34736 \begin_inset space ~
34739 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34745 \begin_layout Description
34746 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34747 's native DVI-format.
34748 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34749 files paths or file names in your document.
34751 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34758 \begin_layout Description
34759 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34760 in files paths or file names
34763 \begin_layout Description
34765 \begin_inset space ~
34772 ) DVI-format using the program
34774 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34777 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34789 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34797 \begin_layout Description
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34802 (cropped) the same as
34806 but with cropped page margins.
34809 \begin_layout Description
34811 \begin_inset space ~
34814 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34818 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34823 \begin_layout Description
34827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34843 \begin_layout Description
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34849 \begin_inset space ~
34852 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34856 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34864 \begin_layout Description
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34877 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34878 source that is compilable with the program
34880 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34884 \begin_layout Description
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34893 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34894 source, additionally all images used in the document
34895 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34899 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34902 \begin_layout Description
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34911 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34912 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34913 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34921 \begin_layout Description
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34934 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34935 source that is compilable with the program
34941 \begin_layout Description
34943 \begin_inset space ~
34947 \begin_inset space ~
34954 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34955 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34961 \begin_layout Description
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34966 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34967 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34973 \begin_inset space \space{}
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34997 represent the version number)
35000 \begin_layout Description
35002 \begin_inset space ~
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35009 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35010 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35011 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35015 \begin_layout Description
35016 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35017 's internal XHTML engine
35020 \begin_layout Description
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35037 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35042 For the conversion the program
35051 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35054 \begin_layout Description
35055 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35060 \begin_layout Description
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35065 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35067 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35070 For the conversion the program
35079 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35082 \begin_layout Description
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35087 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35088 For the conversion the program
35097 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35100 \begin_layout Description
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35105 (cropped) the same as
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35113 but with cropped page margins
35116 \begin_layout Description
35120 \begin_inset space ~
35125 PDF-format using the program
35129 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35132 \begin_layout Description
35136 \begin_inset space ~
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35148 \begin_inset space ~
35153 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35158 \begin_inset space \space{}
35161 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35165 \begin_layout Description
35169 \begin_inset space ~
35174 PDF-format using the program
35176 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35179 , produces PDF-files directly
35182 \begin_layout Description
35186 \begin_inset space ~
35191 PDF-format using the program
35195 , produces PDF-files directly
35198 \begin_layout Description
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35207 PDF-format using the program
35211 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35214 \begin_layout Description
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35223 PDF-format using the program
35228 , produces PDF-files directly
35231 \begin_layout Description
35235 \begin_inset space ~
35243 \begin_layout Description
35247 \begin_inset space ~
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35256 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35257 and then exported as text using the program
35262 \begin_layout Description
35267 PostScript format using the program
35275 options see section
35276 \begin_inset space ~
35280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35282 reference "subsec:General-output"
35289 \begin_layout Description
35290 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35291 source and also code in the statistical programming
35305 it is possible to use
35309 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 If one of the menu entries
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35330 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35332 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35345 \begin_inset Index idx
35348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35349 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35358 \begin_layout Subsection
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35363 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35364 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35367 \begin_inset space ~
35371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35373 reference "sec:Paths"
35378 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35387 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35388 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35389 's preferences as described in section
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35396 reference "subsec:Converters"
35403 \begin_layout Subsection
35404 New and Close Window
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35412 \begin_layout Subsection
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35417 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35420 \begin_layout Section
35422 \begin_inset Index idx
35425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35434 \begin_layout Subsection
35438 \begin_layout Standard
35439 Described in section
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35446 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35453 \begin_layout Subsection
35454 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35458 Described in section
35459 \begin_inset space ~
35463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35465 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35472 \begin_layout Subsection
35476 \begin_layout Standard
35477 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35478 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35481 \begin_layout Subsection
35485 \begin_layout Standard
35486 Selects the whole document.
35489 \begin_layout Subsection
35490 Find & Replace (Quick)
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 Described in section
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35501 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35508 \begin_layout Subsection
35509 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35512 \begin_layout Standard
35513 Described in section
35514 \begin_inset space ~
35518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35520 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35527 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35531 \begin_layout Standard
35532 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35536 \begin_layout Subsection
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Described in section
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35548 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35555 \begin_layout Subsection
35557 \begin_inset Index idx
35560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35561 Paragraph ! Settings
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35571 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35577 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35594 \begin_layout Subsection
35595 Table and Rows & Columns
35598 \begin_layout Standard
35599 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35600 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35601 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35604 \begin_layout Subsection
35608 \begin_layout Standard
35609 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35610 It will dissolve this inset.
35611 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35615 \begin_layout Subsection
35619 \begin_layout Standard
35620 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35621 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35624 \begin_layout Subsection
35625 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35628 \begin_layout Standard
35629 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35631 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35632 \begin_inset space ~
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35638 reference "sec:Nesting"
35643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35645 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35652 \begin_layout Subsection
35655 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35658 \begin_layout Standard
35659 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35660 nts of the same type.
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35668 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35672 for an explanation.
35675 \begin_layout Section
35677 \begin_inset Index idx
35680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35689 \begin_layout Standard
35690 At the bottom of the
35694 menu the opened documents are listed.
35697 \begin_layout Subsection
35698 Open/Close all Insets
35701 \begin_layout Standard
35702 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35705 \begin_layout Subsection
35706 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35709 \begin_layout Standard
35710 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35714 Math macros are described in the
35721 \begin_layout Subsection
35725 \begin_layout Standard
35726 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "sec:Navigating"
35738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35740 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35747 \begin_layout Subsection
35751 \begin_layout Standard
35752 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35760 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35767 \begin_layout Subsection
35771 \begin_layout Standard
35772 Opens a window showing console messages.
35773 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35778 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35779 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35780 is processing the document.
35783 \begin_layout Subsection
35785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35787 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35792 \begin_inset Index idx
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35804 \begin_layout Standard
35805 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35806 All toolbars and the
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35814 can be turned on and off.
35819 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35831 \begin_inset space ~
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35848 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35852 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35864 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35868 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35869 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35870 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35871 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35872 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35875 \begin_layout Standard
35877 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35884 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35891 \begin_layout Subsection
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35924 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35925 's main window vertically while
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_inset space ~
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35953 will split it horizontally.
35954 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35955 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35956 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35957 three or more documents at the same time.
35958 To close a split view, use the menu
35961 \begin_inset space ~
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_layout Subsection
35977 \begin_layout Standard
35978 Closes a split view.
35981 \begin_layout Subsection
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35987 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35988 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35989 's main window fullscreen.
35990 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35991 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35994 \begin_layout Section
35996 \begin_inset Index idx
35999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 \begin_layout Subsection
36012 \begin_layout Standard
36013 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36020 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36031 \begin_layout Subsection
36033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36035 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 Here you can insert the following characters:
36046 \begin_layout Description
36051 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36054 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36055 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36056 -packages you have installed.
36057 You can get a complete display by checking
36060 \begin_inset space ~
36066 \begin_inset Newline newline
36070 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36078 Not all characters will be visible in the
36082 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36083 dialog (see section
36084 \begin_inset space ~
36088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36090 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36094 ) can display every character.
36102 \begin_layout Description
36103 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36107 \begin_layout Description
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36116 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36123 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36130 \begin_layout Description
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36135 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36139 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36150 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36154 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36160 \begin_layout Description
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36165 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36169 \begin_layout Description
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36174 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36178 \begin_layout Description
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36183 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36189 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36195 \begin_layout Description
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36200 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36204 \begin_layout Description
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_inset Index idx
36213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36220 \begin_inset Index idx
36223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36229 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36230 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36232 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36238 \begin_inset Index idx
36241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36249 \begin_inset Newline newline
36252 More information about this feature can be found in the
36258 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36264 \begin_layout Description
36265 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36267 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36268 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36272 \begin_layout Subsection
36276 \begin_layout Standard
36277 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36280 \begin_layout Description
36281 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36282 \begin_inset script superscript
36284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36293 \begin_layout Description
36294 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36295 \begin_inset script subscript
36297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 \begin_layout Description
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36311 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36318 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36325 \begin_layout Description
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36330 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36337 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36344 \begin_layout Description
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36349 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36356 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36363 \begin_layout Description
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36368 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36374 \begin_inset space \space{}
36377 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36378 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36387 To insert a fraction use the command
36392 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36396 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36405 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36412 \begin_layout Description
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36417 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36424 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36431 \begin_layout Description
36433 \begin_inset space ~
36436 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36443 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36450 \begin_layout Description
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36455 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36462 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36469 \begin_layout Description
36470 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36477 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36484 \begin_layout Description
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36489 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36496 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36503 \begin_layout Description
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36508 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36509 \begin_inset space ~
36513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36515 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36522 \begin_layout Description
36524 \begin_inset space ~
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36531 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36538 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36545 \begin_layout Description
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36550 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36551 as described in section
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36558 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36565 \begin_layout Description
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36570 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36571 \begin_inset space ~
36575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36577 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36584 \begin_layout Description
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36589 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36590 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36598 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36605 \begin_layout Description
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36610 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36617 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36624 \begin_layout Description
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36633 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36640 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36647 \begin_layout Subsection
36651 \begin_layout Standard
36652 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36677 are described in section
36678 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36684 reference "sec:toc"
36693 is described in section
36694 \begin_inset space ~
36698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36700 reference "sec:Index"
36708 is described in section
36709 \begin_inset space ~
36713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36715 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36721 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36724 is described in section
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36731 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36738 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36743 To insert floats, as described in section
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36750 reference "sec:Floats"
36754 and in detail the chapter
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_layout Subsection
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36774 To insert notes, described in section
36775 \begin_inset space ~
36779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36781 reference "sec:Notes"
36788 \begin_layout Subsection
36792 \begin_layout Standard
36793 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36795 Branches are described in section
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36802 reference "sec:Branches"
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36814 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36815 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36817 An example is the document class
36818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36825 with three custom insets.
36828 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36832 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36838 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36843 \begin_inset Index idx
36846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36858 For more information see chapter
36860 External Document Parts
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36869 \begin_layout Subsection
36871 \begin_inset Index idx
36874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36883 \begin_layout Standard
36884 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36885 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36892 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36909 dialog as described in section
36910 \begin_inset space ~
36914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36916 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36932 as described in section
36933 \begin_inset space ~
36937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36939 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36946 \begin_layout Subsection
36950 \begin_layout Standard
36955 as described in section
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36962 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36969 \begin_layout Subsection
36971 \begin_inset Index idx
36974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36981 \begin_inset Index idx
36984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36985 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
36993 \begin_layout Standard
36994 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
36995 Floats are described in section
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37002 reference "sec:Floats"
37006 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37008 Multi-page Captions
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_layout Standard
37026 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37033 reference "sec:Index"
37040 \begin_layout Subsection
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37052 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37059 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37065 Tables are described in section
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37072 reference "sec:Tables"
37076 and in detail in the chapter
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37091 \begin_layout Subsection
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37101 Graphics are described in section
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37108 reference "sec:Graphics"
37115 \begin_layout Subsection
37119 \begin_layout Standard
37120 Inserts a URL as described in section
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37127 reference "subsec:URLs"
37134 \begin_layout Subsection
37138 \begin_layout Standard
37139 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37146 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37153 \begin_layout Subsection
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37165 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37172 \begin_layout Subsection
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37184 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37191 \begin_layout Subsection
37195 \begin_layout Standard
37196 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37197 title or caption of a float.
37198 Inserts a short title as described in section
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37205 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37212 \begin_layout Subsection
37217 \begin_layout Standard
37218 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37219 Code box as described in section
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37226 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37233 \begin_layout Subsection
37235 \begin_inset Index idx
37238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37247 \begin_layout Standard
37248 Inserts a program listings box.
37249 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37251 Program Code Listings
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37264 \begin_layout Subsection
37268 \begin_layout Standard
37269 Inserts the actual date.
37270 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37274 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37295 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37302 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37309 \begin_layout Section
37311 \begin_inset Index idx
37314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37323 \begin_layout Standard
37324 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37328 of the current document.
37329 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37332 \begin_layout Subsection
37336 \begin_layout Standard
37337 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37338 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37339 to jump, for example, between section
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37344 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37348 2.5 and use the submenu
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37378 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37382 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37388 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37391 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37395 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37404 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37412 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37415 \begin_layout Subsection
37416 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37419 \begin_layout Standard
37420 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37424 \begin_layout Subsection
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37429 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37430 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37431 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37435 \begin_inset space ~
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37447 \begin_layout Subsection
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37452 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37455 The \SpecialChar LyX
37456 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37471 manual for a detailed description.
37474 \begin_layout Section
37476 \begin_inset Index idx
37479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37488 \begin_layout Subsection
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37493 Change Tracking is described in section
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37500 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37507 \begin_layout Subsection
37515 \begin_layout Standard
37516 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37517 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37518 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37520 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37521 to the clipboard or update the view.
37522 \begin_inset Newline newline
37525 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37532 Open Containing Directory
37534 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37535 's temporary folder for the document.
37536 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37537 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37538 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37539 For example some journals require to send the
37543 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37547 \begin_layout Subsection
37548 Start Appendix Here
37551 \begin_layout Standard
37552 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37553 as described in section
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37560 reference "sec:Appendices"
37567 \begin_layout Subsection
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37577 default output format for the document (menu
37579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37581 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37599 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37603 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37612 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37617 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37635 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37639 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37640 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37642 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37643 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37648 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37653 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37657 \begin_inset space ~
37661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37663 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37668 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37669 when it is first configured.
37670 The default output format is
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37681 \begin_layout Subsection
37682 View (Other Formats)
37685 \begin_layout Standard
37686 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37687 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37688 actual document with an external program.
37689 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37690 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37691 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37693 All possible formats are listed in section
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37700 reference "subsec:Export"
37705 You should at least see the menu entry
37710 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37712 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37714 \begin_inset space ~
37718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37720 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37725 \begin_inset Index idx
37728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37739 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37740 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37742 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37748 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37753 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37757 \begin_inset space ~
37761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37763 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37768 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37769 when it is first configured.
37772 \begin_layout Subsection
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37782 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37785 \begin_layout Subsection
37786 Update (Other Formats)
37789 \begin_layout Standard
37790 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37791 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37794 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 View Master Document
37798 \begin_layout Standard
37799 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37815 \begin_inset space ~
37820 manual for more information on this topic).
37821 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37822 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37835 generates the output of the whole book, while
37839 will just output the chapter alone.
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37844 in the document settings (menu
37846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37847 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37848 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37850 \begin_inset space ~
37854 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37866 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37870 ) or in the preferences (menu
37872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37873 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37878 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37883 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37885 \begin_inset space ~
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37908 \begin_layout Subsection
37909 Update Master Document
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37929 \begin_inset space ~
37934 manual for more information on this topic).
37935 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37936 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37940 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37941 in the document settings (menu
37943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37947 \begin_inset space ~
37951 \begin_inset space ~
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37963 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37967 ) or in the preferences (menu
37969 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37970 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37972 \begin_inset space ~
37975 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37980 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37982 \begin_inset space ~
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37992 \begin_inset space ~
37996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37998 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38005 \begin_layout Subsection
38007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38009 name "subsec:Compressed"
38016 \begin_layout Standard
38017 Un/compresses the current document.
38018 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38019 compression (see the
38021 Additional Features
38023 manual for details).
38026 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38031 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 The document settings are described in appendix
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38046 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38053 \begin_layout Section
38055 \begin_inset Index idx
38058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38072 Spell checking is explained in section
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38079 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38086 \begin_layout Subsection
38090 \begin_layout Standard
38091 The thesaurus is described in section
38092 \begin_inset space ~
38096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38098 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38105 \begin_layout Subsection
38107 \begin_inset Index idx
38110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 \begin_inset Index idx
38120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38130 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38131 the highlighted document part.
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38140 \begin_inset Index idx
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 Generates with the help of the program
38156 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38159 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38160 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38161 This feature is not available on Windows.
38164 \begin_layout Subsection
38170 \begin_inset Index idx
38173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38189 \begin_inset space ~
38194 to see the full filename paths.
38197 \begin_layout Subsection
38199 \begin_inset Index idx
38202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38212 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38213 files as described in section
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38220 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38227 \begin_layout Subsection
38229 \begin_inset Index idx
38232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38245 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38263 \begin_inset Index idx
38266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38267 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38277 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38278 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38279 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38280 -packages and programs it needs; see
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38288 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38295 \begin_layout Subsection
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38304 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38305 \begin_inset space ~
38309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38311 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38318 \begin_layout Section
38320 \begin_inset Index idx
38323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 \begin_layout Standard
38333 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38334 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38336 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38349 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38350 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38351 packages and classes found
38352 by \SpecialChar LyX
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38360 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38367 \begin_layout Standard
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38376 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38381 \begin_layout Section
38383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38385 name "sec:Toolbars"
38392 \begin_layout Standard
38393 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38400 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38408 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38409 This is described in the
38411 Additional Features
38416 \begin_layout Subsection
38418 \begin_inset Index idx
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38431 \begin_inset Graphics
38432 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38447 \begin_layout Standard
38448 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 \begin_inset Note Note
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38474 manual for more information.
38482 \begin_layout Standard
38483 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38489 \begin_layout Standard
38490 \begin_inset Tabular
38491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38492 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38500 \begin_inset Graphics
38501 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38515 pull-down box for the environments
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38529 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38537 \begin_inset Tabular
38538 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38539 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38540 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38595 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38625 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 arg "spelling-continuously"
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 Spellcheck continuously
38689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38772 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38945 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 Emphasize text, function of the
38975 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38980 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 Set text to noun style, function of the
39012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39017 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 arg "textstyle-apply"
39043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39047 Format text using the current settings in the
39049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39054 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39087 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39135 arg "tabular-insert"
39143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39165 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 Toggle outline window on/off,
39179 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39247 \begin_layout Subsection
39249 \begin_inset Index idx
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 \begin_layout Standard
39262 \begin_inset Graphics
39263 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39271 \begin_layout Standard
39272 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39278 \begin_layout Standard
39279 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39284 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39290 \begin_layout Standard
39291 \begin_inset Tabular
39292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39293 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39294 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39295 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39332 arg "layout Enumerate"
39340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 arg "layout Itemize"
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39413 arg "layout Description"
39421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 arg "depth-increment"
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 arg "depth-decrement"
39486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 arg "float-insert figure"
39524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39547 arg "float-insert table"
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39638 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39684 \begin_inset space ~
39693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 arg "nomencl-insert"
39710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39736 arg "footnote-insert"
39744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39815 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39835 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39944 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39960 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39975 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39995 arg "dialog-show character"
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40030 arg "layout-paragraph"
40038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40064 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40078 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40092 \begin_layout Subsection
40093 View/Update Toolbar
40094 \begin_inset Index idx
40097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40098 Toolbar ! View / Update
40106 \begin_layout Standard
40107 \begin_inset Graphics
40108 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40115 \begin_layout Standard
40116 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40128 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40134 \begin_layout Standard
40135 \begin_inset Tabular
40136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40137 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40138 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40179 arg "buffer-update"
40187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 arg "master-buffer-view"
40217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40243 arg "master-buffer-update"
40251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40263 \begin_inset space ~
40272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40281 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40296 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40297 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40298 Synchronize with Output
40304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40328 View (Other Formats)
40334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40341 arg "update-others"
40349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40356 Update (Other Formats)
40369 \begin_layout Standard
40370 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40374 \begin_layout Subsection
40378 \begin_layout Standard
40379 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40386 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40390 , the table toolbar
40391 \begin_inset Index idx
40394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40408 manual and the math macro toolbar
40409 \begin_inset Index idx
40412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40425 \begin_layout Chapter
40426 The Document Settings
40427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40429 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40434 \begin_inset Index idx
40437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40438 Document ! Settings
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40455 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40456 is called with the menu
40458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40462 You can save your document settings as default with the
40464 Save as Document Defaults
40466 button in any dialog.
40467 This will create a template named
40471 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40472 when you create a new document without
40476 \begin_layout Standard
40481 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40482 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40486 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40487 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40488 to find the one you are looking for.
40489 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40490 the submenus of the dialog.
40492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40496 \begin_inset space \space{}
40500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40507 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40508 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40509 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40512 \begin_layout Section
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40519 Document classes are described in section
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40526 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40543 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40548 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40549 as a layout for a document class.
40550 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40552 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40561 \begin_layout Standard
40562 Some classes use special class options by default.
40563 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40567 and you can decide to use them or not.
40568 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40569 recommended you leave them untouched.
40574 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40575 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40580 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40582 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40589 \begin_inset Newline newline
40594 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40597 \begin_inset Newline newline
40600 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40601 distribution, see section
40606 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40608 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40620 \begin_layout Standard
40625 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40626 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40627 in the background if the child document
40628 is opened without its master.
40629 This way child documents are always compilable.
40630 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_layout Standard
40646 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40657 \begin_inset Index idx
40660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40662 -packages ! prettyref
40668 \begin_inset Index idx
40671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40673 -packages ! refstyle
40678 for cross-references, see section
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40685 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40692 \begin_layout Section
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40698 Please refer to the section
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40714 manual for details.
40717 \begin_layout Section
40721 \begin_layout Standard
40722 Modules are explained in section
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40729 reference "subsec:Modules"
40736 \begin_layout Section
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40748 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40755 \begin_layout Section
40759 \begin_layout Standard
40760 The document font settings are described in section
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40767 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40774 \begin_layout Section
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40779 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40796 and whether it should be a
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40804 can also be specified here.
40807 \begin_layout Standard
40808 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40809 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40810 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40812 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40815 \begin_layout Standard
40818 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40821 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40822 justifies the text on screen.
40823 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40827 \begin_layout Section
40831 \begin_layout Standard
40832 This dialog is described in sections
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40839 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40846 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40853 \begin_layout Section
40857 \begin_layout Standard
40858 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40865 reference "subsec:Margins"
40872 \begin_layout Section
40874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40876 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40881 \begin_inset Index idx
40884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 Language ! Encoding
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40895 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40896 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40898 is always encoded in utf8).
40899 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40900 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40901 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40902 -command is not known for
40903 a particular character).
40906 \begin_layout Standard
40907 If you use the option
40912 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40913 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40914 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40916 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40917 exactly one encoding.
40918 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40921 \begin_layout Standard
40923 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40924 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40925 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40926 installation supports Unicode), choose
40927 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40928 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40929 is quite incomplete, so
40930 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40935 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40936 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40937 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40938 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40939 -commands is not used, because all
40940 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40941 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40942 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40943 , two new alternative engines
40944 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40946 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40948 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40979 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40984 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40988 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40991 \begin_layout Standard
40995 \begin_inset space ~
41000 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41001 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41011 The possible settings are:
41014 \begin_layout Description
41015 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41018 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41028 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41035 \begin_layout Description
41036 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41037 format you will use.
41038 In many cases this will be
41043 \begin_inset Index idx
41046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41054 If the newer package
41059 \begin_inset Index idx
41062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41064 -packages ! polyglossia
41069 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41070 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41071 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41073 this package will be used instead of
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41093 would be more appropriate.
41096 \begin_layout Description
41097 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41098 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41102 (for German texts), type in
41105 \begin_inset Newline newline
41110 usepackage{ngerman}
41113 \begin_layout Description
41114 None will not use a language package.
41115 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41118 \begin_layout Standard
41119 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41122 \begin_layout Description
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41139 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41145 \begin_inset Index idx
41148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41150 -packages ! inputenc
41156 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41157 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41158 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41162 \begin_layout Description
41163 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41165 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41166 commands, which may result in a big
41167 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41168 -commands are needed.
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41183 \begin_layout Description
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41192 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41195 \begin_layout Description
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41200 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41203 \begin_layout Description
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41212 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41213 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41216 \begin_layout Description
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41225 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41229 \begin_layout Description
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41238 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41239 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41242 \begin_layout Description
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41255 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_layout Description
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41275 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41276 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41279 \begin_layout Description
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41288 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41289 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41290 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41291 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_layout Description
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41311 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41312 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41313 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41315 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_layout Description
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41338 \begin_layout Description
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41347 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41350 \begin_layout Description
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41359 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41362 \begin_layout Description
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41367 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41370 \begin_layout Description
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41375 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41387 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41390 \begin_layout Description
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_layout Description
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41411 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41414 \begin_layout Description
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41426 \begin_layout Description
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41435 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41441 \begin_inset Index idx
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41451 , when using this, set the document language to
41456 \begin_layout Description
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41465 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41470 , when using this, set the document language to
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_layout Description
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41488 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41494 \begin_inset Index idx
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41499 -packages ! japanese
41504 , when using this, set the document language to
41509 \begin_layout Description
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41518 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41523 , when using this, set the document language to
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41537 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41542 , when using this, set the document language to
41547 \begin_layout Description
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41552 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41555 \begin_layout Description
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41568 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41571 \begin_layout Description
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41584 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41585 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41586 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41589 \begin_layout Description
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41601 \begin_layout Description
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41610 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41611 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41614 \begin_layout Description
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41623 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41629 \begin_inset Index idx
41632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41639 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41642 \begin_layout Description
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset space ~
41655 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41662 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41665 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41672 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41673 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41675 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41678 \begin_layout Description
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41687 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41693 \begin_inset Index idx
41696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41706 \begin_layout Description
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41711 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41717 \begin_inset Index idx
41720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41722 -packages ! inputenc
41728 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41732 \begin_layout Description
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41745 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41752 \begin_layout Description
41754 \begin_inset space ~
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41765 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41766 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41767 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41771 \begin_layout Description
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41784 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41785 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41788 \begin_layout Section
41790 \begin_inset Index idx
41793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41800 \begin_inset Index idx
41803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41810 \begin_inset Index idx
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 Color ! Shaded boxes
41820 \begin_inset Index idx
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41832 \begin_layout Standard
41833 Here you can alter the font color for the
41837 (default: black), for
41840 \begin_inset space ~
41845 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41849 (default: white) and for
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41862 sets the color back to the default.
41865 \begin_layout Standard
41866 Clicking any button showing
41874 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41875 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41876 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41877 later more quickly.
41880 \begin_layout Standard
41881 Note, if you change the
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41889 font color and use the option
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41897 in the document settings under
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41905 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41912 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41920 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41939 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41945 Code after a forced page break:
41948 \begin_layout Itemize
41949 For the page color:
41950 \begin_inset Newline newline
41957 pagecolor{color name}
41960 \begin_layout Itemize
41961 For the text color:
41962 \begin_inset Newline newline
41972 \begin_layout Standard
41973 You are restricted to one of
42009 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42016 \begin_inset space ~
42022 \begin_inset Newline newline
42025 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42026 names to refer to them:
42029 \begin_layout Itemize
42035 \begin_inset Newline newline
42040 page_backgroundcolor
42043 \begin_layout Itemize
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset Newline newline
42061 \begin_layout Itemize
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42071 \begin_inset Newline newline
42079 \begin_layout Itemize
42083 \begin_inset space ~
42089 \begin_inset Newline newline
42097 \begin_layout Standard
42098 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42101 \begin_inset space ~
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42117 \begin_layout Section
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42122 Here you can adjust the
42126 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42130 as described in section
42131 \begin_inset space ~
42135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42137 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42144 \begin_layout Section
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42149 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42155 \begin_inset Index idx
42158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 \begin_inset Index idx
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42175 -packages ! jurabib
42183 Sectioned bibliography
42185 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42191 \begin_inset Index idx
42194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42196 -packages ! bibtopic
42201 and you can select a
42205 for the generation of the bibliography.
42206 For a further description see section
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42213 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42220 \begin_layout Section
42224 \begin_layout Standard
42225 Here you can define the
42229 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42231 \begin_inset space ~
42235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42237 reference "sec:Index"
42244 \begin_layout Section
42248 \begin_layout Standard
42249 The PDF properties are explained in section
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42256 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42263 \begin_layout Section
42267 \begin_layout Standard
42268 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42269 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42275 \begin_inset Index idx
42278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 -packages ! amsmath
42290 \begin_inset Index idx
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42295 -packages ! amssymb
42305 \begin_inset Index idx
42308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42320 \begin_inset Index idx
42323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42335 \begin_inset Index idx
42338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 -packages ! mathdots
42350 \begin_inset Index idx
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 -packages ! mathtools
42365 \begin_inset Index idx
42368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42380 \begin_inset Index idx
42383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 -packages ! stackrel
42395 \begin_inset Index idx
42398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42400 -packages ! stmaryrd
42410 \begin_inset Index idx
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 -packages ! undertilde
42420 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42423 \begin_layout Description
42424 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42425 -errors in formulas,
42426 ensure that you have this enabled.
42429 \begin_layout Description
42430 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42431 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42432 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42436 \begin_layout Description
42437 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \begin_layout Description
42453 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42456 \begin_inset space ~
42468 \begin_layout Description
42469 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42480 \begin_layout Description
42481 mathtools is used for the math commands
42517 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42524 \begin_layout Description
42525 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42527 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42536 \begin_layout Description
42537 stackrel is used for the math command
42554 \begin_layout Description
42555 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42558 \begin_layout Description
42559 undertilde is used for the math command
42567 Accents for one Character
42576 \begin_layout Section
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 The float placement options are described in the section
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42600 \begin_layout Section
42604 \begin_layout Standard
42605 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42607 Program Code Listings
42612 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_layout Section
42624 \begin_layout Standard
42625 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42633 set to be used and set the
42638 The itemize environment is described in section
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42645 reference "sec:Itemize"
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 You can furthermore specify a
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42661 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42662 command of the desired character.
42663 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42670 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42676 \begin_inset space \space{}
42680 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42690 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42691 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42704 -packages in the preamble (menu
42707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42708 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42717 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42721 usepackage{textcomp}
42724 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42728 usepackage{amssymb}
42738 \begin_layout Section
42742 \begin_layout Standard
42743 Branches are described in section
42744 \begin_inset space ~
42748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42750 reference "sec:Branches"
42757 \begin_layout Section
42759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42761 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42772 \begin_layout Description
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42781 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42801 View Master Document
42802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42809 Update Master Document
42810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42817 menu or the toolbar.
42818 The default is set in
42820 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42821 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42826 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42836 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42843 \begin_layout Description
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42849 \begin_inset space ~
42852 Output settings for the menu
42854 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42862 For a detailed description see section
42864 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_layout Description
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42883 \begin_inset space ~
42886 Options offers settings for the export format
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42899 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42903 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42907 \begin_inset space ~
42912 settings are described in detail in section
42914 Math Output in XHTML
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42928 \begin_inset space ~
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42937 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42940 \begin_layout Description
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42947 Save transient properties
42949 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
42950 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
42951 The properties that are affected by option are currently
42955 \begin_layout Itemize
42956 the activation of change tracking
42959 \begin_layout Itemize
42960 the output of tracked changes
42963 \begin_layout Itemize
42964 the recording of the document directory path.
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
42969 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
42973 \begin_layout Section
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42982 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42984 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42986 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42988 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42994 -syntax is given in section
42995 \begin_inset space ~
42999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43001 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43008 \begin_layout Chapter
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43016 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43021 \begin_inset Index idx
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43033 \begin_layout Standard
43034 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43036 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43040 It has the following submenus.
43043 \begin_layout Section
43047 \begin_layout Subsection
43051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43052 User Interface File
43053 \begin_inset Index idx
43056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43057 Customization ! of toolbars
43063 \begin_inset Index idx
43066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43067 Customization ! of menus
43075 \begin_layout Standard
43076 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43077 interface (ui) file.
43078 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43086 \begin_layout Description
43091 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43094 \begin_layout Description
43101 the menu entries in popup context menus
43104 \begin_layout Description
43109 specifies the toolbar buttons
43112 \begin_layout Standard
43113 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43114 and edit the entries.
43117 \begin_layout Standard
43118 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43130 entries must be finished with an explicit
43155 and in the case of the
43156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43168 The syntax for the entries is:
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43172 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43201 \begin_layout Standard
43203 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43206 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43207 -functions are listed in the menu
43209 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43220 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43227 For example, assuming you use the menu
43229 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43232 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43263 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43278 to have the sixth bookmark.
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43290 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43291 's toolbar buttons.
43292 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43296 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43307 \begin_layout Standard
43310 Enable tool tips in main work area
43312 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43320 \begin_layout Standard
43325 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43326 should display in the menu
43328 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43338 \begin_layout Subsection
43342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43349 Restore window layouts and geometries
43352 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43353 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43357 \begin_layout Standard
43360 Restore cursor positions
43362 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43366 \begin_layout Standard
43369 Load opened files from last session
43371 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43375 \begin_layout Standard
43378 Clear all session information
43380 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43381 sessions (cursor positions, names
43382 of last opened documents, etc.).
43385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43389 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43394 \begin_inset Index idx
43397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43409 Backup original documents when saving
43411 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43412 it was saved the last time.
43413 It is stored in the
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43428 reference "sec:Paths"
43432 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43441 The backup file has the file extension
43442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43459 Backup documents, every
43461 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43464 \begin_layout Standard
43467 Save documents compressed by default
43469 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43476 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43481 This applies to newly created documents only.
43482 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43486 Windows & work area
43489 \begin_layout Standard
43492 Open documents in tabs
43494 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43498 \begin_layout Standard
43503 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43516 reference "sec:Paths"
43520 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43527 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43528 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43529 of \SpecialChar LyX
43531 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43532 instance is created for each file.
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Single close-tab button
43540 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43550 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43551 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43563 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43564 before the change takes effect.
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43577 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43579 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43581 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43585 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43586 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43587 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43590 \begin_layout Subsection
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43604 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43611 \begin_layout Standard
43612 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43616 \begin_layout Standard
43617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43625 This section only deals with the fonts
43629 the \SpecialChar LyX
43631 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43647 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43664 (depends on the system) as its
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_layout Standard
43684 You can change the font size with the
43691 \begin_layout Standard
43696 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43701 points have the size of 1
43702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43712 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43717 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43722 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43729 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43736 \begin_layout Standard
43739 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43741 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43742 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43743 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43744 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43745 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43747 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43754 \begin_layout Subsection
43756 \begin_inset Index idx
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43767 \begin_inset Index idx
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43779 \begin_layout Standard
43780 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43781 by choosing an item in the
43782 list and selecting the
43789 \begin_layout Standard
43790 By checking the option
43794 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43797 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43807 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43810 \begin_layout Subsection
43812 \begin_inset Index idx
43815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43834 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43835 This feature is described in section
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43842 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43849 \begin_layout Standard
43850 Checking the option
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43866 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43869 \begin_layout Section
43871 \begin_inset Index idx
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43883 \begin_layout Subsection
43887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43894 Cursor follows scrollbar
43896 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43900 \begin_layout Standard
43901 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43902 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43903 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43909 Scroll below end of document
43911 is self-explanatory.
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 In \SpecialChar LyX
43916 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43923 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43925 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43926 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43929 \begin_layout Standard
43932 Sort environments alphabetically
43934 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43937 \begin_layout Standard
43940 Group environments by their category
43942 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43950 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43971 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43972 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43976 \begin_layout Subsection
43978 \begin_inset Index idx
43981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43988 \begin_inset Index idx
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 Settings ! Shortcuts
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44005 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44007 Several binding files are available, among them:
44010 \begin_layout Description
44011 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44014 \begin_layout Description
44015 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44027 \begin_layout Description
44028 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44039 \begin_layout Standard
44040 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44045 , and binding files for special languages.
44046 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44051 \begin_inset space \space{}
44055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44063 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44064 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44065 will try to use the appropriate binding
44069 \begin_layout Standard
44070 Some binding files, like
44074 , only have a limited scope.
44075 When looking at the end of the file
44079 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44095 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44096 in the selected key binding file.
44099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44103 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44108 \begin_inset Index idx
44111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 Key Bindings ! Editing
44120 \begin_layout Standard
44121 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44122 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44123 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44124 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44127 Show key-bindings containing
44130 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44131 Insert there for example as keyword
44132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44139 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44140 functions that contain
44141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44149 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44150 All \SpecialChar LyX
44151 functions are also listed in the file
44156 that you will find in the
44163 \begin_layout Standard
44164 For example, to add the shortcut
44172 , select the function and press the
44177 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44178 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44181 \begin_layout Standard
44182 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44183 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44185 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44186 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44188 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44193 \begin_layout Standard
44194 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44197 \begin_layout Standard
44198 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44200 The syntax of the entries is:
44203 \begin_layout Standard
44209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44228 \begin_layout Subsection
44230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44232 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44237 \begin_inset Index idx
44240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 \begin_inset Index idx
44250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44259 \begin_layout Standard
44260 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44261 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44262 provides keyboard maps.
44263 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44264 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44276 and select the keyboard map file named
44283 \begin_layout Standard
44292 keyboard map and, if you use the
44296 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44299 arg "keymap-primary"
44305 arg "keymap-secondary"
44308 respectively or toggle between them with
44311 arg "keymap-toggle"
44317 \begin_layout Standard
44318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 You can also specify the mouse
44338 Wheel scrolling speed
44341 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44345 Middle mouse button pasting
44347 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44348 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44351 \begin_layout Standard
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44368 you can select a key for zooming.
44369 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44372 \begin_layout Subsection
44376 \begin_layout Standard
44377 Input completion is described in section
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44384 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44391 \begin_layout Section
44393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44400 \begin_inset Index idx
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 \begin_inset Index idx
44413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44423 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44424 are normally determined during
44426 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44429 \begin_layout Description
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44434 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44435 's working directory.
44436 It is the default when you
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_layout Description
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44460 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44462 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_layout Description
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44481 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44487 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44491 \begin_inset Newline newline
44495 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44508 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44516 \begin_layout Description
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44522 \begin_inset Index idx
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44531 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44532 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44539 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44547 will be used to save the backups.
44548 \begin_inset Newline newline
44551 Backup files have the ending
44552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44562 \begin_layout Description
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44567 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44568 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44570 \begin_inset Newline newline
44577 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44583 You can edit this file with the program
44592 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44593 in its preferences under
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44602 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44607 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44609 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44610 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44616 and \SpecialChar LyX
44617 need to be running the same time.
44618 \begin_inset Newline newline
44621 The pipe is also used for the
44625 feature, see section
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44632 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44637 \begin_inset Newline newline
44640 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44641 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44642 \begin_inset Newline newline
44658 \begin_layout Description
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44663 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44666 \begin_layout Description
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44671 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44672 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44673 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44676 \begin_layout Description
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44681 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44687 You only need to specify it if you are using
44691 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44693 For \SpecialChar LyX
44698 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44702 \begin_layout Description
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44707 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44708 When \SpecialChar LyX
44709 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44710 to find it on the system.
44711 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44713 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44722 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44723 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44731 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44732 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44733 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44734 code or in the document
44736 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44738 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44739 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44740 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44741 scanned for the input files.
44742 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44743 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44745 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44746 compilation may fail for some documents.
44749 \begin_layout Section
44753 \begin_layout Standard
44754 Here you can insert your
44763 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44771 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44775 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44778 \begin_layout Section
44780 \begin_inset Index idx
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 Language ! Settings
44790 \begin_inset Index idx
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44794 Settings ! Language
44802 \begin_layout Subsection
44804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44806 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44813 \begin_layout Description
44815 \begin_inset space ~
44819 \begin_inset space ~
44822 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44824 You can find its actual translation status here:
44825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44827 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44834 \begin_layout Description
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44839 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44840 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44841 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44842 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44859 The most widespread language package is
44864 \begin_inset Index idx
44867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44876 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44877 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44878 come with the alternative
44884 \begin_inset Index idx
44887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44889 -packages ! polyglossia
44894 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44895 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44901 The available selections are described in section
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44908 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44915 \begin_layout Description
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44920 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44921 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44922 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44923 An example is the start command
44929 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44931 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44950 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44955 \begin_layout Description
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44965 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44966 command toggles the package on and off.
44969 \begin_layout Description
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44978 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44982 \begin_layout Description
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44995 \begin_layout Description
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45004 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45005 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45006 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45008 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45015 \begin_layout Description
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45020 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45022 When this option is not set, the
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45030 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45032 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_layout Description
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45057 When it is not set, the
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45065 is set to the end of the document.
45068 \begin_layout Description
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45077 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45078 language will be underlined in blue.
45081 \begin_layout Description
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45090 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45091 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45094 \begin_layout Description
45096 \begin_inset space ~
45099 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45100 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45101 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45102 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45105 \begin_layout Subsection
45109 \begin_layout Standard
45110 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45117 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45124 \begin_layout Section
45128 \begin_layout Subsection
45130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45132 name "subsec:General-output"
45139 \begin_layout Description
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45144 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45146 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45154 For a detailed description see section
45156 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45169 \begin_layout Description
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45174 Options Options for the program
45178 that is used for the export format
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45189 reference "subsec:Export"
45194 Possible options are listed in the
45199 \begin_inset Newline newline
45203 \begin_inset Flex URL
45206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45208 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45218 \begin_layout Description
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45227 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45230 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45231 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45239 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45242 \begin_layout Description
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45248 \begin_inset Index idx
45251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 \begin_inset Index idx
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 Settings ! Date format
45267 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45268 \begin_inset Newline newline
45272 \begin_inset Flex URL
45275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45277 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45283 \begin_inset Newline newline
45286 For example the format
45287 \begin_inset Newline newline
45291 \begin_inset Newline newline
45294 prints the date as day/month/year.
45297 \begin_layout Description
45299 \begin_inset space ~
45303 \begin_inset space ~
45306 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45307 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45310 \begin_layout Subsection
45316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45318 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45323 \begin_inset Index idx
45326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45336 \begin_layout Description
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45353 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45358 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45379 are used for Cyrillic.
45380 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45393 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45395 sets up in the background.
45396 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45399 \begin_layout Description
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45416 options They only have an effect when the program
45420 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45424 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45425 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45426 manuals of the applications.
45429 \begin_layout Description
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45441 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45448 \begin_layout Description
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45454 \begin_inset space ~
45458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45460 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45467 \begin_layout Description
45469 \begin_inset space ~
45472 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45479 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45486 \begin_layout Description
45492 \begin_inset space ~
45495 command Command for the program
45497 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45500 that is described in the section
45502 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45507 Additional Features
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45513 There are additionally the following options:
45516 \begin_layout Description
45518 \begin_inset space ~
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45526 \begin_inset space ~
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45538 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45556 to separate folders.
45557 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45559 \begin_inset Index idx
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 \begin_inset Index idx
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_layout Description
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_inset space ~
45591 \begin_inset space ~
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45599 \begin_inset space ~
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45606 changes Removes all manually set
45612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45613 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45615 \begin_inset space ~
45620 dialog when changing the document class.
45623 \begin_layout Section
45625 \begin_inset space ~
45629 \begin_inset Index idx
45632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45641 \begin_layout Subsection
45643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45645 name "subsec:Converters"
45650 \begin_inset Index idx
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 \begin_layout Standard
45663 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45664 from one format to another.
45665 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45666 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45678 field and press the
45683 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45692 drop-down list, modify the
45696 field and press the
45703 \begin_layout Standard
45706 Converter File Cache
45712 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45714 Maximum Age (in days
45717 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45718 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45722 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45723 definition, is described in the section
45734 \begin_layout Subsection
45736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45738 name "sec:File-Formats"
45743 \begin_inset Index idx
45746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 \begin_inset Index idx
45756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45766 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45776 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45780 You can also define the
45782 Default output format
45784 that is used when you use
45786 View, Update, View Master Document
45790 Update Master Document
45796 menu or the toolbar.
45799 \begin_layout Standard
45800 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45811 \begin_layout Standard
45812 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45814 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45815 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45816 This is done by specifying a
45821 More about this is described in the section
45832 \begin_layout Chapter
45833 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45835 \begin_inset Index idx
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45847 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45854 \begin_layout Standard
45856 \begin_inset space ~
45860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45862 reference "tab:Units"
45866 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45867 and used in this documentation.
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 \begin_inset Float table
45877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45878 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45904 \begin_inset Tabular
45905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45906 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46115 scaled point (65536
46116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46194 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46267 % of original image width
46272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46583 \begin_layout Chapter
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46587 name "chap:Credits"
46594 \begin_layout Standard
46595 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46596 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46599 \begin_layout Itemize
46602 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46605 \begin_layout Itemize
46611 \begin_layout Itemize
46617 \begin_layout Itemize
46623 \begin_layout Itemize
46629 \begin_layout Itemize
46635 \begin_layout Itemize
46641 \begin_layout Itemize
46647 \begin_layout Itemize
46650 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46653 \begin_layout Itemize
46659 \begin_layout Itemize
46665 \begin_layout Itemize
46671 \begin_layout Itemize
46677 \begin_layout Itemize
46683 \begin_layout Itemize
46689 \begin_layout Itemize
46695 \begin_layout Itemize
46701 \begin_layout Itemize
46702 The \SpecialChar LyX
46704 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46713 \begin_layout Standard
46714 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46717 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46724 \begin_layout Bibliography
46725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46726 LatexCommand bibitem
46732 The \SpecialChar LyX
46734 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46737 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46742 \begin_inset Newline newline
46746 \begin_inset Flex URL
46749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46751 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46759 \begin_layout Bibliography
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46761 LatexCommand bibitem
46762 key "latexcompanion"
46766 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46768 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46769 Companion Second Edition.
46772 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46775 \begin_layout Bibliography
46776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46777 LatexCommand bibitem
46782 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46785 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46789 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46792 \begin_layout Bibliography
46793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46794 LatexCommand bibitem
46802 : A Document Preparation System.
46805 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46808 \begin_layout Bibliography
46809 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46810 LatexCommand bibitem
46819 The \SpecialChar TeX
46823 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46826 \begin_layout Bibliography
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46828 LatexCommand bibitem
46833 The \SpecialChar TeX
46835 \begin_inset Newline newline
46839 \begin_inset Flex URL
46842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46852 \begin_layout Bibliography
46853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46854 LatexCommand bibitem
46859 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46861 \begin_inset Newline newline
46865 \begin_inset Flex URL
46868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46870 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46878 \begin_layout Bibliography
46879 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46880 LatexCommand bibitem
46886 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46888 name "Documentation"
46889 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46895 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46899 \begin_inset Newline newline
46903 \begin_inset Flex URL
46906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46908 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46916 \begin_layout Bibliography
46917 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46918 LatexCommand bibitem
46924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46926 name "Documentation"
46927 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46931 how to use the program
46933 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46937 \begin_inset Newline newline
46941 \begin_inset Flex URL
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46946 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46954 \begin_layout Bibliography
46955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46956 LatexCommand bibitem
46962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46964 name "Documentation"
46965 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46974 \begin_inset Newline newline
46978 \begin_inset Flex URL
46981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46991 \begin_layout Bibliography
46992 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46993 LatexCommand bibitem
46994 key "makeindex-man"
46999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47002 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47011 \begin_inset Newline newline
47015 \begin_inset Flex URL
47018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47028 \begin_layout Bibliography
47029 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47030 LatexCommand bibitem
47036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47038 name "Documentation"
47039 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47048 \begin_inset Newline newline
47052 \begin_inset Flex URL
47055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47057 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47065 \begin_layout Bibliography
47066 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47067 LatexCommand bibitem
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47075 name "Documentation"
47076 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47080 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47082 \begin_inset Newline newline
47086 \begin_inset Flex URL
47089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47091 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47099 \begin_layout Bibliography
47100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47101 LatexCommand bibitem
47107 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47109 name "Documentation"
47110 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47114 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47120 \begin_inset Index idx
47123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47125 -packages ! caption
47131 \begin_inset Newline newline
47135 \begin_inset Flex URL
47138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47140 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47148 \begin_layout Bibliography
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47150 LatexCommand bibitem
47156 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47158 name "Documentation"
47159 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47163 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47169 \begin_inset Index idx
47172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47174 -packages ! enumitem
47180 \begin_inset Newline newline
47184 \begin_inset Flex URL
47187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47189 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47197 \begin_layout Bibliography
47198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47199 LatexCommand bibitem
47205 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47207 name "Documentation"
47208 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47212 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47218 \begin_inset Index idx
47221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47223 -packages ! fancyhdr
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47233 \begin_inset Flex URL
47236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47238 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47246 \begin_layout Bibliography
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47248 LatexCommand bibitem
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47256 name "Documentation"
47257 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47261 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47267 \begin_inset Index idx
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47272 -packages ! hyperref
47278 \begin_inset Newline newline
47282 \begin_inset Flex URL
47285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47287 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47295 \begin_layout Bibliography
47296 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47297 LatexCommand bibitem
47303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47305 name "Documentation"
47306 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47310 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47316 \begin_inset Index idx
47319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47321 -packages ! nomencl
47327 \begin_inset Newline newline
47331 \begin_inset Flex URL
47334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47336 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47344 \begin_layout Bibliography
47345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47346 LatexCommand bibitem
47352 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47354 name "Documentation"
47355 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47359 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47365 \begin_inset Index idx
47368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47370 -packages ! prettyref
47376 \begin_inset Newline newline
47380 \begin_inset Flex URL
47383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47385 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47393 \begin_layout Bibliography
47394 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47395 LatexCommand bibitem
47401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47403 name "Documentation"
47404 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47408 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47414 \begin_inset Index idx
47417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47419 -packages ! refstyle
47425 \begin_inset Newline newline
47429 \begin_inset Flex URL
47432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47434 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47442 \begin_layout Bibliography
47443 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47444 LatexCommand bibitem
47450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47453 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47457 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47459 \begin_inset Newline newline
47463 \begin_inset Flex URL
47466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47468 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47476 \begin_layout Bibliography
47477 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47478 LatexCommand bibitem
47484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47487 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47491 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47493 \begin_inset Newline newline
47497 \begin_inset Flex URL
47500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47502 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47510 \begin_layout Bibliography
47511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47512 LatexCommand bibitem
47518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47521 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47525 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47526 for Cyrillic languages:
47527 \begin_inset Newline newline
47531 \begin_inset Flex URL
47534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47536 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47544 \begin_layout Bibliography
47545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47546 LatexCommand bibitem
47552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47555 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47559 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47561 \begin_inset Newline newline
47565 \begin_inset Flex URL
47568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47570 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47578 \begin_layout Bibliography
47579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47580 LatexCommand bibitem
47586 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47589 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47593 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47595 \begin_inset Newline newline
47599 \begin_inset Flex URL
47602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47604 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47612 \begin_layout Bibliography
47613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47614 LatexCommand bibitem
47620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47623 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47627 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47629 \begin_inset Newline newline
47633 \begin_inset Flex URL
47636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47638 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47646 \begin_layout Bibliography
47647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47648 LatexCommand bibitem
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47657 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47661 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47663 \begin_inset Newline newline
47667 \begin_inset Flex URL
47670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47672 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47680 \begin_layout Bibliography
47681 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47682 LatexCommand bibitem
47688 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47691 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47695 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47697 \begin_inset Newline newline
47701 \begin_inset Flex URL
47704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47706 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47714 \begin_layout Bibliography
47715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47716 LatexCommand bibitem
47722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47725 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47729 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47731 \begin_inset Newline newline
47735 \begin_inset Flex URL
47738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47740 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47748 \begin_layout Bibliography
47749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47750 LatexCommand bibitem
47756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47759 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47763 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47765 \begin_inset Newline newline
47769 \begin_inset Flex URL
47772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47774 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47782 \begin_layout Bibliography
47783 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47784 LatexCommand bibitem
47790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47793 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47797 about new features in
47803 \begin_inset Newline newline
47807 \begin_inset Flex URL
47810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47812 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47820 \begin_layout Standard
47821 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47855 \begin_inset Note Note
47858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47865 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47866 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47867 bibliography is the second one:
47875 \begin_layout Standard
47876 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47877 LatexCommand bibtex
47878 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47879 options "biblio/alphadin"
47886 \begin_layout Standard
47887 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47891 \begin_layout Standard
47892 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47893 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47899 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47900 LatexCommand printindex